Panasonic DMR-EX84C Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions

DVD Recorder

Model No. DMR-EX84C

Dear customer

Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully. Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely.

Please keep this manual for future reference.

Guide

Quick Start

Basic

operations

∫ Notice for DVB functions

≥DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project. ≥This DVD recorder is equipped with a Common Interface. It can receive encrypted

digital broadcast services.

≥The tuner in this unit is compatible with digital broadcast (digital CATV broadcast or

digital terrestrial broadcast) and analogue broadcast services.

In these operating instructions,

[DVB-C] : indicates features applicable to digital CATV broadcasts (DVB-C). [DVB-T] : indicates features applicable to digital terrestrial broadcasts (DVB-T). [Analogue] : indicates features applicable to analogue broadcasts.

∫ TV Guide Types

TV Guide is displayed with the provided data from broadcast stations.

For digital terrestrial broadcasts (DVB-T) or Analogue broadcasts: The GUIDE Plus+ system is available in Germany/Austria. (as of December 2010)

≥This service may not be available in some areas in the above countries. ≥There may be changes in the service areas.

Region number supported by this unit

Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders and DVD-Video according to where they are sold.

≥The region number of this unit is “2”. ≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with labels containing “2” or “ALL”.

About descriptions in these operating instructions

≥Pages to be referred to are

indicated as “> ±±”.

Example:

2 ALL

Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com

VQT3C69

Safety precautions

Getting started

(Inside of product)

Remote control signal sensor

7 m directly in front of the unit

supplied accessories

WARNING

∫ Unit

≥To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product damage,

– Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing. – Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on this

unit. – Use only the recommended accessories. – Do not remove covers. – Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to qualified

service personnel. – Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit. – Do not place heavy items on this unit.

∫ AC mains lead

≥To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product damage,

– Ensure that the power supply voltage corresponds to the voltage

printed on this unit. – Insert the mains plug fully into the socket outlet. – Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead. – Do not handle the plug with wet hands. – Hold onto the mains plug body when disconnecting the plug. – Do not use a damaged mains plug or socket outlet.

≥Install this unit so that the AC mains lead can be unplugged from

the socket outlet immediately if any problem occurs.

CAUTION

∫ Unit

≥ This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or

performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

≥ Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted candles, on

this unit.

≥ This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile

telephones during use. If such interference occurs, please increase separation between this unit and the mobile telephone.

≥ This unit is intended for use in moderate climates.

∫ Placement

≥ Place this unit on an even surface. ≥ To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product damage,

– Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in cabinet or

in another confined space. Ensure this unit is well ventilated. – Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with newspapers,

tablecloths, curtains, and similar items. – Do not expose this unit to direct sunlight, high temperatures,

high humidity, and excessive vibration.

∫ Batteries

≥ Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only

with the type recommended by the manufacturer.

≥ Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and may

cause a fire. – Do not mix old and new batteries or different types at the same

time. – Do not heat or expose to flame. – Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct sunlight

for a long period of time with doors and windows closed. – Do not take apart or short circuit. – Do not recharge alkaline or manganese batteries. – Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off. – Remove batteries if you do not intend to use the remote control

for a long period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.

≥ When disposing the batteries, please contact your local authorities

or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Please check and identify the supplied accessories. (Product numbers correct as of December 2010. These may be subject to change.)

∏ 1 Remote control

∏ 1 AC mains lead

∏ 1 RF coaxial cable

∏ 2Batteries

(N2QAYB000471)

For use with this unit only. Do not use it with other equipment. Also, do not use cords for other equipment with this unit.

for remote control

The remote control information

∫ Batteries

Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.

R6/LR6, AA

≥Use alkaline or manganese batteries. ≥Remote control operations (> 4)

∫ Use

VQT3C69

The distance and angles are an approximate.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

Table of contents

Getting started

Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

supplied accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

Quick Start Guide

Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Easy access to various functions

— FUNCTION MENU Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

STEP 1

Insert the CAM (Conditional Access Module) and

Smart Card

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

STEP 2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

STEP 3 Channel reception settings and TV aspect

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

STEP 4 Setting the CI or CI Plus

(Common Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

HDD and disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

USB memory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Regarding DivX files, Music files and still pictures

(JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Media handling (Disc/USB memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Basic operations

Watching Television. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Playing recorded video contents/

Playing play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Recording television programmes [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Timer recording [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Advanced operations

Notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

General notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

For recording to discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Recording modes and approximate recording/copying times . . 23

When the format confirmation screen is displayed. . . . . . . . . . . 23

When removing a recorded disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Advanced recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Recording broadcasts/titles from external

equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Making timer recordings on the television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Recording from digital satellite receiver or video equipment

—

Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Linked timer recordings with external equipment

(digital satellite receiver) — EXT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Advanced timer recording [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Check, change or delete a programme, or resolve

overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . 27

If the “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears . . . . . . . . 27

Language for digital broadcast with multi-audio or

multi-subtitle (Digital broadcast only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Operations in the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Searching for the programme in the TV Guide list . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Selecting the programme from the desired programme type or

category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

HOWVIEW number to make timer recordings

Using S

(Analogue broadcast only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Changing the Settings and Editing TV Guide for Analogue

broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

[DVB-T] Series recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

[DVB-T] Useful functions in GUIDE Plus+ system . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Advanced playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Operation during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play

—DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance . . . . . . . . . . . 33

To sort the titles for easy searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

To play grouped titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

To edit the group of titles [HDD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

To play the title from the beginning [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

To play music CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

To play music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Useful functions during music play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures

(JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Showing the menu screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Playing DivX video contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Playing Music files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Playing still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Start Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Linked operations with the TV

(VIERA Link “HDAVI Control

Easy control only with VIERA remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

”/Q Link) . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Convenient functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

To pause the TV programme you are watching

—Pause Live TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Editing

Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Creating, editing and playing Playlists (Video) . . . . . . 44

Editing still pictures and music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Creating, editing and playing Playlists (Picture) . . . . . 48

Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Copying

Copying titles or Playlists (Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW

(DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Copying Video (MPEG2) from a video equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Copying still pictures/Playlist (Picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Copying new still pictures on the USB memory

—Copy New Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Copying using the copying list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Copying still pictures on the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Copying music to HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Copying music from a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/

DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Setting menus

Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 60

HDD and disc management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Deleting all titles and Playlists (Video) — Delete all titles. . . . . . . 62

Providing a name for a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Deleting all the contents — Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Selecting the background style—Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first

—Auto-Play Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Enabling discs to be played on other equipment—Finalise . . . . 63

Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

HOLD function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

CI Plus compatible CAM (Conditional Access Module) software

upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Reference

Additional connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Connecting a television with AUDIO/VIDEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Connecting a stereo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal . . . . . . . . . . 73

Connecting a television and VCR, digital satellite receiver . . . . . 73

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Back Cover

Getting startedQuick Start

Basic

Advanced

EditingSetting menusReference Copying

VQT3C69

Guide

operations

Control reference guide

Quick Start Guide



HDD

DVD

Recording indicator Playback

indicator

Recording/Playback indicator

Remote control

Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.













 





 





OPTION



DRIVE SELECT

DELETE

SKIP

STOP

STATUS

AUDIO

REC

ヵユヹヵ



VOL

INPUT

SELECT

SLOW/SEARCH

PAUSE

PAUSE LIVE TV

MANUAL SKIP

CHAPTER

-10s

EXT LINK

REC MODE

STTL

DISPLAY

PAGE

ShowView

PROG/CHECK

PLAY/x1.3

EXIT

RETURN

+60s

DIRECT TV REC

TIME SLIP







 

 





  



 

1 Turn the unit on (> 8)

2 Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 18)

Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].

3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers

4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still

pictures or music (> 21, 26, 47)

5 Basic operations for recording and play

[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching (> 41)

6 Show digital channel information (> 17)/Programme information

within TV Guide screen (> 27)/Show status messages (> 61)

7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 32)

8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 33, 42)

9 Show OPTION menu (> 28, 42)

By using the OPTION button, you may access the various functions (Slideshow, Standby Settings, etc.) quickly and easily.

: Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 32)

; Colour buttons

– for TV Guide operations (> 27) – for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 33, 34, 37) – for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 53) – for switching PICTURE/Playlists (> 56) – for deactivating timer programme (> 26) – for showing the Series Information screen (> 31) – for selecting character type when entering text (> 50) – for tuning settings (> 65)

< Recording functions

≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 19) ≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 19) ≥[EXT LINK] Linked timer recordings with external equipment

(> 25)

≥[¥ DIRECT TV REC] Direct TV Recording (> 39)

= Show Teletext information (>

> Transmit the remote control signal

? Television operations (> 72)

@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system

(> 16, 27)

A Show S

B Input select (AV1 or AV2) (> 25)

C Show Timer Recording screen (> 26)

D Exit the menu screen

E Show the TV Guide screen (> 20, 27)

F Show FUNCTION MENU (> 41)

G Return to previous screen

H Create chapter (> 32)

I Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 32)

J Skip approx. 10 seconds backward (> 32)

K Skip the specified time (> 32)

L Show on-screen menu (> 60)

M Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast

HOWVIEW screen (> 29)

By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.

Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio or subtitle etc.

programme has subtitles.) (> 16)

16)

The unit’s display

HDD

DVD



1 Disc indicator 2 Digital broadcast indicator

Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.

3 Copying indicator 4 USB port indicator 5 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator 6 Timer recording indicator 7 Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator

VQT3C69

 

COPY

USB EXT

-L

REC

PLAY

8 Main display section indicator

9 Remote control visual feedback

This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.

: Recording/Playback indicator

REC

PLAY

REC

PLAY

Main unit

Pull to flip down the front panel.

Select a function.

Selectable items are displayed on the right.

Select an item.

Press [OK].

 





1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (> 8)

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of power.

2 Disc tray (> 15) 3 USB port (> 15) 4 Display (> 4) 5 Open/Close disc tray (> 15) 6 Channel select (> 16)

7 Start recording (> 19)/Specify a time to stop recording (> 19) 8 Stop (> 18, 19, 32) 9 Start play (> 18) : Remote control signal sensor (> 2)

Rear panel terminals (> 6, 7, 73)

Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION MENU Display

“FUNCTION MENU” automatically appears when you turn the power on. (When “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu) You can access the main function quickly and easily.

Select when you wish to playback the contents. The DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen or menu screen etc. will be displayed.

Select the recording method. The TV Guide, Timer Recording or ShowView Record screen will be displayed.

Select the title or file type you wish to delete. The DELETE Navigator screen will be displayed.

Select the copy method.

Select to watch TV with the tuner of this unit. “View” is displayed in the FUNCTION MENU when this unit is connected with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later. (> 39)

Select and execute a function other than those above, such as recording or setting.

Change which drive is used.

HDD

 

 

 



FUNCTION MENU

Playback

Recording Delete

Copy View

Others Drive Select

RETURN

Remain

Video Picture Music

30:00 SP

1 Playback

Video (> 18, 33) DivX (> 35) Picture (> 37) Music (> 34, 36) Top Menu (> 18) Menu (> 18)

2 Recording

TV Guide (> 20, 27) Timer Recording (> 20, 26) ShowView Record (> 29)

3 Delete

Video (> 21) Picture (> 47) Music (> 47)

4 Copy

Video (HDD to DVD) (> 52) Advanced Copy (> 53) Copy Music CD (> 58) Copy Music (> 58) Copy New Pictures (> 56)

5 View

6 Others

Playlists (> 44, 48) Flexible Rec (> 24) HDD Management (> 61) DVD Management (> 61) Setup (> 64)

7 Drive Select

HDD DVD USB

Note

If you do not need to display FUNCTION MENU when turning the unit on, set “FUNCTION MENU Display” to “Off” in the Setup menu (



Guide

Quick Start

68).

VQT3C69

STEP 1

OUT

AV OUT

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(

BITSTREAM

)

COMMON INTERFACE

CI (Common Interface)

slot

CAM (Conditional Access Module)

Smart Card

This unit’s rear panel

OUT

AV OUT

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(

BITSTREAM

)

COMMON INTERFACE

To the terrestrial aerial

Television’s rear panel

Aerial cable/ CATV coaxial cable

This unit’s rear panel

To household mains socket

(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

AC mains lead

(supplied)

Connect only after all other connections are

complete.

“AV2 Input” setting in the Setup menu (> 70)

21-pin Scart

cable

Cooling fan

Connecting a terminal other than the 21-pin Scart terminal (> 7, 73)

RF coaxial cable

(supplied)

Connect the unit directly to the television

If you connect the unit through an AV selector or video cassette recorder to the television, video signal will be affected by copyright protection systems and the picture may not be shown correctly.

≥When connecting to a television

with a built-in VCR

Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there are both television and VCR input terminals.

Common Interface (CI) slot

In order to view or record encrypted CATV services, you must insert a certified CAM and Smart Card into this slot. (> above)

Cable

Digital satellite receiver’s rear panel

For viewing digital satellite broadcasts, connect this unit with a digital satellite receiver before connecting the AC mains lead.

Insert the CAM (Conditional Access Module) and Smart Card

You need a Conditional Access Module together with a valid Smart Card and a subscription with the corresponding CATV provider if you want to watch/record encrypted digital CATV broadcasts.

1 Insert the certified Smart Card into the commercially available CAM (Conditional Access Module). 2 Insert the CAM into the CI (Common Interface) slot of this unit.

TV service encryption is automatically cancelled and the service can be viewed or recorded.

≥When using unencrypted digital terrestrial broadcasts or analogue broadcasts, you do not need to insert CAM. Proceed to STEP 2. (> below)

The recording might be prohibited by broadcasters.

Note

RF IN

VIDEO

RF OUT

AUDIO

OUT

COMMON INTERFACE

AV1 (TV)

AV OUT

OPTICAL

AV2

(

)

EXT

AC IN

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

PCPCM/M/BITSTREAM

AC IN

≥Be sure to insert the CAM horizontally into the slot. ≥Insert the CAM with the correct direction. ≥For more details, see the manual of the CAM and Smart

Card, or consult the dealer.

≥The Common Interface supports the modules according to

DVB Specification and CI Plus Specification.

≥Unplug the AC mains lead before you insert or remove the

CAM with Smart Card. Remove it slowly.

STEP 2 Connection

Using a 21-pin Scart cable

≥You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (> 39). ≥You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television (> 86).

Required setting

“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (> 69)

≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions. ≥Refer to “Additional connections” (> 73) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.

When the unit is not to be used for a long time

To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off.

[approx. 0.3 W (“Power Save in Standby” is

activated and “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off”.)]

Connecting a television

Required setting

VQT3C69

VHF/UHF

RF IN

RF OUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

OUT

(

COMMON INTERFACE

AV1 (TV)

AV2

)

EXT

AV OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

PCPCM/M/BITSTREAM

AC IN

DO NOT

Television

VCR

This unit

You can enjoy high-quality picture by adding the HDMI cable connection to the 21-pin Scart cable connection between this unit and your TV.

OUTOUT

AV OUTAV OUT

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTDIGITAL AUDIO OUT (PCPCM/M/BITSTREAMBITSTREAM

)

RF IN

RF OUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV1 (TV)

OPTICAL

AV2

(

EXT

)

COMMON INTERFACE

COMMON INTERFACECOMMON INTERFACE

HDMI IN

HDMI AV OUT

Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

21-pin Scart cable

This unit’s rear panel

HDMI cable

Television’s rear panel

Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)

If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected, the following functions are available.

≥Direct TV Recording (> 39) ≥Watching pictures from digital satellite receiver

(In this case, make sure to switch the television input to “AV”.)

≥Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical”

(> 69). (The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)

Digital satellite receiver's rear panel

OUT

AV OUT

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(

BITSTREAM

)

COMMON INTERFACE

This unit’s rear panel

HDMI cable

Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

Television’s rear panel

Receiver’s rear panel

Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) cable

When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video. ≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,

native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.

≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover). ≥When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.

Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function

When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible. [> 39, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control

≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised. ≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.

Recommended part number: RP-CDHS15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHS50 (5.0 m), etc.

”/Q Link)]

Guide

Quick Start

Required setting

Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver

RF IN

RF OUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

OUT

AV1 (TV)

AV2

(

)

EXT

Note

≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (> 85) and

output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)

≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.

For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input terminal (PC monitors, etc.): Depending on the unit, images may not be displayed properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

COMMON INTERFACE

AV OUT

HDMI AV OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

PCPCM/M/BITSTREAM

VQT3C69

STEP 3 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings

Numbered buttons

Auto Setup

Digital Cable (DVB-C) & Analogue Channels Digital Terrestrial (DVB-T) & Analogue Channels Digital Cable (DVB-C) Channels Digital Terrestrial (DVB-T) Channels

DVB Auto Setup

Quick Scan

Full Scan

DVB Auto Setup

Progress 0% 100%

No.

Quality

Channel Name Type

Das Erste

ZDF

1 2

Data

9 9

Active Antenna

Please check whether your indoor antenna has its own power supply or needs

Off

DVB Auto Setup

Scan CH 5 69

Quality

Channel Name Type

ABC

ABC 2

1 2

Data

9 9

Power Save in Standby

Power Save On

:00

From

:00

Saves standby power consumption



DRIVE

SELECT

DELETE

SKIP

STOP

STATUS

OPTION



PAUSE

PAUSE LIVE TV

VOL

PAGE

ShowView

PROG/CHECK

INPUT

SELECT

SLOW/SEARCH

PLAY/x1.3

RETURN

EXIT

FUNCTION MENU



,,,

RETURN

1 Turn on the television and select the

appropriate AV input to suit the connections to this unit.

2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.

≥If the Language setting menu appears on the television,

press [3, 4] to select the language and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the

broadcasting systems and press [OK].

Digital terrestrial broadcasting Auto Setup (Selecting 2 or 4 on step 3)

Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].

When using indoor antenna that is not equipped with power supply, select “On”.

“DVB Auto Setup” starts.

The unit will search for the terrestrial digital channels. TV channels will be located and stored ready for use. This takes 5-10 minutes.

When selecting 2, analogue broadcasting “Auto Setup” is executed after “DVB Auto Setup” is completed.

5 Press [3, 4] to select “On”, “Off” or

“On Timer” and press [OK] when the “Power Save in Standby” setting menu appears.

1 Digital Cable (DVB-C) & Analogue Channels:

Performs the digital CATV broadcasting and analogue broadcasting Auto-Setup.

2 Digital Terrestrial (DVB-T) & Analogue Channels:

Performs the digital terrestrial broadcasting and analogue broadcasting Auto-Setup.

3 Digital Cable (DVB-C) Channels:

Performs the digital CATV broadcasting Auto Setup only.

4 Digital Terrestrial (DVB-T) Channels:

Performs the digital terrestrial broadcasting Auto Setup only.

4 Scan and set up broadcasting

channels.

Digital CATV broadcasting Auto Setup (Selecting 1 or 3 on step 3)

Press [3, 4] to select “Quick Scan” or “Full Scan” and press [OK].

“DVB Auto Setup” starts.

≥“Quick Scan” searches according to NIT (Network

Information Table) of CATV operators. This takes about 5 minutes. If no digital channels are found by “Quick Scan”, “Full Scan” starts continuously.

≥“Full Scan” searches all range of the frequency.

This takes about 20 minutes.

When selecting 1, analogue broadcasting “Auto Setup” is executed after “DVB Auto Setup” is completed.

On: It will go into the Power Save in Standby mode

when the unit is in standby mode.

Off: It is possible to start quickly from the standby mode.

On Timer:

(Quick Start mode)

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to set the start and stop time and then press [OK]. ≥“Power Save in Standby” is set to activate during

the setting time period.

The features of the Power Save in Standby function when the unit is in standby mode are as below.

Power Save in Standby Activated (On/

On Timer

Power consumption

Approx. 0.3 W Startup time Not Quick

Watching the picture

Cannot do Can do

§1

)

§3

Approx. 16 W

Quick

(e.g. Digital satellite TV) from the device connected to AV2

§1

“Unit’s Display” is set to “Automatic” in the Setup menu. (

68)

§2

It is possible to startup and start recording within several seconds.

– Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it

may take time to display the screen.

§3

When “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off” in the Setup menu (

71)

If the TV aspect setting screen appears on the television. Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect and press [OK].

≥16:9:

When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television

≥Pan & Scan:

When connected to a 4:3 aspect television, side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture (> 85).

≥Letterbox:

When connected to a 4:3 aspect television. 16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style (> 85).

When television picture appears, setup is complete.

Deactivated

Off

)

(

§2

VQT3C69

If the confirmation screen of GUIDE Plus+ data download

Post Code

Current Country : Germany This unit downloads GUIDE Plus+ data several times a day.

CHANGE

appears, perform the following steps.

(For information about GUIDE Plus+ system > 10)

6 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

7 Press the numbered buttons or

[3, 4, 2, 1] to enter your postal code and press [OK].

GUIDE Plus+ data download starts. This takes about 30 minutes.

8 When the download has finished

Press [OK].

Set up is complete.

To stop partway

Press [RETURN ].

∫ If the clock setting menu appears

Set the clock manually (> 70).

∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned

correctly (> 65)

∫ To restart set up (> 64) ∫ Settings of the TV Guide for Analogue

broadcasts (> right)

Note

≥When you turn the unit on after inserting the CAM and Smart Card,

depending on the card provider, a PIN code or parental control code may be demanded. (> 10)

Settings of the TV Guide for Analogue broadcasts

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and

press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

press [1].

5 Press [3, 4] to select “TV Guide

Type” and press [OK].

6 Press [3, 4] to select “Analogue

Channels” and press [OK].

7 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

≥It will go into Standby status once, and the power will be

turned on again automatically. This procedure may take a few minutes.

≥All of the TV Guide data for digital broadcasts and timer

recording settings will be erased.

8 After the power is turned on,

Download the GUIDE Plus+ data following the instructions on the screen.

≥It may take up to 2 hours to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system. ≥If the “Postal Code” screen is displayed, press

[3, 4, 2, 1] or the numbered buttons to enter the postal code.

Guide

Quick Start

TV Guide system

TV Guide system provides programme information from the broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV programme magazine. This unit can receive either of the TV Guides for the digital or analogue broadcasts. After the Auto Setup (> 8) has completed, it is set to receive the TV Guide for the digital broadcasts. It is required to change the settings to use the TV Guide for the analogue broadcasts. (> right)

[DVB-T] [Analogue] You can use the GUIDE Plus+ system for TV Guide. (> 10, 30)

Note

≥TV Guide does not work if the clock is not set correctly. ≥If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (> 69), the TV Guide

system cannot be used.

≥If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains, all programme data

are not updated. The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the

≥

aerial input of this unit. It is not possible to receive the data via the externally connected digital satellite receiver or digital set-top boxes.

≥It is possible to record analogue broadcasts using Manual

recording, even without changing the TV Guide Type, and vice versa. (> 26, 29)

9 Confirm the message on the screen.

≥If “No Data” appears (> 30, Editing TV Guide, Reference) ≥If “No Host channel detected.” appears (> 30, Changing the

settings, Host Channel)

≥If “Data download was unsuccessful.” appears (> 30,

Changing the settings, Data Download)

To stop partway

Press [RETURN ].

VQT3C69

STEP 3 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings

Numbered buttons

TV Guide data download

Analogue broadcasts

The GUIDE Plus+ data is transmitted from the Host Channel (the

Digital broadcasts

≥[DVB-C] GUIDE Plus+ system is not available (> below) ≥[DVB-T] GUIDE Plus+ system may not be available in some areas.

When GUIDE Plus+ system is available:

– Download automatically in standby mode – Download manually from “GUIDE Plus+ Data Download Now” in

the Setup menu (> 71).

When GUIDE Plus+ system is not available:

– Download automatically while the unit is on. – Download automatically in standby mode

Download in Standby” is set to “On” in the Setup menu (> 71)

To select the time to download in standby mode (> 71, TV Guide/Software search period)

For GUIDE Plus+ system

Visit the following homepage for more information.

http://www.europe.guideplus.com

if “TV Guide

television station transmitting the television programme list) several times a day. Data will be transmitted at 2:50 AM every day.

– Download automatically when the unit is turned off.

≥If you turn on the unit while “GUIDE” appears, the data update

is interrupted.

≥If the GUIDE Plus+ data download at 2:50 AM and a timer

recording overlap, you can select which will be given priority. (> 30, Night Download)

– Download manually from “Data Download” in the Setup menu.

(> 30)

Note

≥Depending on when you set up this unit, it may take approximately

one day before you can display the television programme list.

≥A station that is not registered in your area is not displayed in the

television programme list even if a signal can be received.

≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead during data download. ≥During data download, the HDD rotates and will make operating

sounds.

STEP 4 Setting the CI or CI Plus (Common Interface)

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

≥For more information about TV service, please contact your

service provider.

∫ PIN code query

When you turn the unit on after inserting the card, depending on the card provider, a PIN code or parental control code may be demanded. 1 Enter the 4-digit code with the numbered buttons.

Delete an incorrect number with [DELETE ¢].

2 Confirm your password with [OK].

Note

≥Other settings on the card, e.g. changing the password, can be

adjusted in the Setup menu. (> 70)

≥Do not set any limitations about parental controls in “Common

Interface” or recording/viewing programmes may not be possible. Set the parental ratings level using “Child Lock” function. (> 66)

≥Depending on the card, in some cases its use together with this

unit may be limited or not possible.

DELETE

,,,



DRIVE SELECT

DELETE

SKIP

STOP

STATUS

OPTION

AUDIO



2 54 8 0

PAUSE

PAUSE LIVE TV

CHAPTER

VOL

PAGE

ShowView

PROG/CHECK

INPUT

SELECT

SLOW/SEARCH

PLAY/x1.3

EXIT

RETURN

MANUAL SKIP

-10s

+60s

EXIT

FUNCTION MENU

RETURN

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Common

VQT3C69

press [OK].

and press [1].

Setup

Tuning Disc Picture Sound

Display Connection Others

TV Aspect TV System HDMI Settings AV1 Output AV2 Settnigs Active Antenna Common Interface

SELECT

16:9 PAL

Video

Off

TAB

RETURN

Interface” and press [OK].

The features that appear on the screen are dependent on the contents of the inserted CAM and Smart Card. Follow the on-screen instructions.

≥On-screen operation guide may not correspond to the

remote control buttons.

HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care

Do not place the unit on amplifiers or equipment that may become hot.

The heat can damage the unit.

DO NOT

The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device that is easily susceptible to damage. As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.

∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust

Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.

∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device

The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.

∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD

If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.

≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.

∫ Setup precautions

≥Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan

and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.

≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to

vibration or impact.

≥Do not place on anything that

generates heat like a video cassette recorder, etc.

≥Do not place in an area often subject to

temperature changes.

≥Place in an area where condensation

does not occur. Condensation is a phenomenon where moisture forms on a cold surface when there is an extreme change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal damage to the unit.

≥Conditions where condensation may occur

– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from

a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is subjected to cold air, condensation may form on the inside of

the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD heads, etc. – When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room. – During the rainy season.

In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until condensation is gone.

DO NOT

This unit

VCR

∫ HDD recording time remaining

This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording. If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a Playlist (Video) will not increase the amount of time.)

∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or

breakdown

The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor, etc. gets inside the unit.

∫ While operating

≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD

may become damaged.)

≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains

socket, or flip the power breaker switch. While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or movement due to rotation is normal.

∫ When moving the unit

1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.) 2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket. 3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.

2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock. (Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for a short time.)

Guide

Quick Start

∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content

Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).

Unit care

The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust. Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.

To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit. ≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the

instructions that came with the cloth.

Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and viewing with pleasure.

Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it impossible to record or play discs. Use the Lens cleaner (not supplied) about once every year, depending on frequency of use and the operating environment. Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.

Note

Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.

Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.

Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the unit.

VQT3C69

HDD and disc information

HDD and discs you can use for recording/copying and play

(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)

Disc type

Standard symbol

Data that can be recorded and played Video, Still picture, Music Rewritable ≤ Timer recording ≤ Recording 16:9 aspect picture (> 22) ≤ Recording of copyright-protected titles

Depending on the copy restriction level, these titles may not be recorded.

Hard disk drive (HDD)

[HDD]

≤

≥Use of Panasonic discs is recommended.

For available recording/copying times for different discs under different recording modes, see “Recording modes and approximate recording/copying times” (> 23).

≥Formatting and/or recording/initializing constraints may

prevent you from playing or recording certain discs.

≥Please see specifications (> 84) for compatible disc

versions and recording speeds.

≥Recording M 1 and/or M 2 for bilingual broadcasts

(> 22, 52)

Disc type DVD-RAM DVD-R

Standard symbol [RAM] [-R] before finalisation

Data that can be recorded and played Video, Still picture Video or Still picture

Rewritable ≤ – Play on other players ≤

Timer recording – Recording 16:9 aspect picture (> 22) ≤ Recording of copyright-protected titles

Format (> 62) Necessary Unnecessary

Depending on the copy restriction level, these titles may not be recorded.

Disc type DVD-RW +RW

Standard symbol [-RW‹V›] before finalisation

Data that can be recorded and played Video Rewritable ≤ – Play on other players ≤

Timer recording – Recording 16:9 aspect picture (> 22) ≤ – (4:3 aspect) Recording of copyright-protected titles – Format (> 62) Necessary

≥This disc can be played back on

Panasonic DVD recorders and DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.

(EXT LINK)

≤

[DVD-V] after finalisation

≥Finalisation is needed

(> 63).

≥This disc can be played

back only on equipment compatible with +RW discs.

≥If the disc failed to play

on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (> 63).

[DVD-V] after finalisation (Video only)

≥Videos and still pictures cannot be

mixed on one disc.

≥Finalisation is needed (> 63).

–

[+RW] [+R] before finalisation

≤

–

[DVD-V] after finalisation

≤

≥Finalisation is needed

(> 63).

[-R]DL] before finalisation [DVD-V] after finalisation

≥Finalisation is needed

(> 63).

≥This disc can be played

back only on equipment compatible with DVD-R DL discs.

–

DVD-R DL

Video

≤

+R DL

–

[+R]DL] before finalisation [DVD-V] after finalisation

≤

≥Finalisation is needed

(> 63).

≥This disc can be played

back only on equipment compatible with +R DL discs.

VQT3C69

∫ Recording format

This unit records video in the following formats.

DVD Video Recording format [HDD] [RAM]

This is a recording method which allows you to record/copy and edit television broadcasts and so on. ≥You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create Playlists (Video),

etc.

≥Copyright-protected titles (TV programmes) can be recorded to a

CPRM compatible disc using EXT LINK function.

DVD-Video format [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

This recording method is the same as commercially available DVDVideo. ≥Copyright-protected titles cannot be recorded/copied even if using

a CPRM compatible disc.

≥After finalising the disc, you can play the disc on DVD players and

other equipment.

+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

This is a method for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs. You can playback such discs recorded in this method in a similar way as contents recorded in the DVD-Video format.

≥Copyright-protected titles cannot be recorded/copied. ≥After finalising the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the

disc on DVD players and other equipment.

Note

≥+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with

another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible. However, discs that are finalised are compatible and can be played.

≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)

≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the

discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.

Play-only discs

Disc type Logo Standard symbol Uses

DVD-Video [DVD-V] High quality movie and music discs

DVD-RW (DVD

Video

Recording

format)

[-RW‹VR›] DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder

≥You can play copyright-protected titles if they have been recorded onto

a CPRM compatible disc.

≥By formatting (> 62) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video

format.

≥It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for

recording.

DVD-R

DVD-R DL

DivX

/MP3/

JPEG

≥DVD-R and DVD-R DL with video recorded in DivX ≥DVD-R and DVD-R DL with music recorded in MP3

≥DVD-R and DVD-R DL with still pictures recorded in JPEG

CD [CD]

–

DivX

JPEG

/MP3/

Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW

≥CD-R and CD-RW with video recorded in DivX ≥CD-R and CD-RW with music recorded in MP3

)

≥CD-R and CD-RW with still pictures recorded in JPEG

Video CD [VCD]

≥Recorded music and video (including CD-R/RW

)

SVCD

Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.

≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating

instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.

≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.

Guide

Quick Start

Discs that cannot be played

≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm ≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring ≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit

and not finalised (> 85).

≥Discs recorded with AVCHD format. ≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or “ALL” ≥DVD-Audio ≥Blu-ray, HD DVD ≥DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,

SACD, MV-Disc, PD

≥DVD-RAM with a cartridge (TYPE 1)

Types of disc or title recorded on HDD for the type of connected TV

When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table. (≤: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)

TV type Disc/Titles recorded

on HDD

Multi-system TV PAL ≤

NTSC ≤

PAL TV PAL ≤

NTSC

NTSC TV PAL –

NTSC

§1

If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals the picture will not be shown correctly.

§2

Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (> 69).

≥When playing back a disc or title recorded on the HDD, ensure that

you match the “TV System” setting to the disc or title (PAL or NTSC) (> 69).

The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by such loss.

Examples of causes of such losses are ≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD

Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another

company. ≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this

unit. ≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer

disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this

unit.

§1

≤

Yes /No

(PAL60)

§2

≤

VQT3C69

USB memory information

USB memories you can use on this unit

Compatible USB memories USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP

protocol:

– USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.

≥USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used. ≥USB memories that support bulk only transfer.

CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported. Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not supported.

≥ ≥MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported. ≥A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.

Format FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.

≥UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported. ≥Depending on the sector size, some files may not work. ≥Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.

Indicated in these instructions by [USB] Data that can be played or copied (≤: Possible, –: Impossible)

File format Playing

DivX

≤

MP3 Still pictures (JPEG)

≤≤

Copying to HDD – ≤≤ Instructions

You can play DivX with a computer onto the USB memory (> 35).

Video images of the copyright-protected DivX® contents stored on USB device can be output only through the HDMI output terminal. (> 36)

≥Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.

files recorded

You can play and copy to HDD MP3 files recorded with a computer onto the USB memory (> 36, 58).

You can play and copy to HDD or DVD-RAM still pictures recorded with a computer onto the USB memory (> 37, 56, 57).

≥If a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc. is connected to this unit’s USB port, you can copy the SD Video recorded with the camera to

this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.

Note

≥This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.

Regarding DivX files, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)

VQT3C69

DivX

Playable media: [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

§1

File format: DivX

≥Files must have the extension “.DIVX”, “.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.

Number of folders

Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300 folders (including the root folder)

Number of files

Maximum number of files recognizable

§2

: 200 files

Support version

Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile V3.0.

Video

– Number of stream: Up to 1 – Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DX50 – 16 k 16 to 720 k 576 (25 fps)

16 k 16 to 720 k 480 (30 fps)

– Aspect Ratio: 10:11, 40:33, 16:11, 12:11, 1:1

Audio

– Number of stream: Up to 8 – Format: MP3, MPEG, Dolby Digital – Multi channel: Dolby Digital is possible. MPEG multi is 2 ch

conversion.

– Bitrate: 16 kbps to 320 kbps (MP3/MPEG),

32 kbps to 448 kbps (Dolby Digital)

– Sampling frequency.: 16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/

44.1 kHz/48 kHz (MP3/MPEG)/32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz (Dolby Digital)

MP3

Playable media: [HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] File format: MP3

≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

Maximum number of folders (groups or albums) recognizable:

300 folders (groups or albums) (including the root folder)

§2

Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable

: 3000 files (tracks)

Bit rates:

32 kbps to 320 kbps

Sampling frequency:

16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz ID3 tags: compatible ([HDD] [USB])

≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,

play may not be possible.

§3

Still pictures (JPEG

)

Playable media: [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] File format: JPEG

≥Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.

Compatible pixels

Between 34k34 and 6400k6400 (Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0) [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

Maximum number of folders

§4

recognizable: 300 folders

[HDD] [RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of 300 folders

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

Maximum number of files

§4

recognizable§2: 3000 files

[HDD] [RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of 3000 files

MOTION JPEG/PROGRESSIVE JPEG: Not supported

§1

Video images of the copyright-protected DivX contents stored on USB device can be output only through the HDMI output terminal. (> 36)

§2

Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG, DivX and other types of files is 4000.

§3

It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.

§4

When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not display or be playable.

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] ≥Compatible formats:

ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended formats) and Joliet

≥This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for DVD-

R DL), but reading or play of the disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.

≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files

(tracks) and/or folders (groups or albums) and some files (tracks) may not display or be playable.

≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.

Other characters may not be displayed correctly.

≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is

displayed on a computer.

≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files

(tracks) and folders (groups or albums) may not play in the order you numbered them.

≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format. ≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not be

played.

[HDD] [RAM] ≥Compatible formats: DCF

digital camera, etc.)

§5

Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established

§5

compliant (Content recorded on a

by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).

∫ Structure of folders displayed by this unit

Root

Order of play

(folder=group)

(file=track)

Root

Order of play

002 Folder

003 Folder

004 Folder

Root

Insert label-up.

You can play Music files (MP3) and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by making folders as shown below. However depending on the method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.

Structure of MP3 folders

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the order you want to play them.

001

001.mp3

002.mp3

003.mp3

002

001.mp3

002.mp3

003.mp3

001.mp3

002.mp3

003.mp3

004.mp3

003

Structures of still picture folders

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Files inside a folder are displayed in the order they were updated or taken.

Media handling (Disc/USB memory)

Inserting discs

1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.

[RAM]

Folders can be created on other equipment.

These folders cannot be selected as a copying destination.

≥If a folder name or file name has been input

using other equipment, the name may not be

P0000001.jpg P0000002.jpg

DCIM

P0000003.jpg P0000004.jpg P0000005.jpg

P0000008.jpg P0000009.jpg

XXXXX

XXXX



P0000006.jpg P0000007.jpg

jpg

displayed properly or you may not be able to play or edit the data.

Disc care

∫ How to hold a disc

Do not touch the recorded surface.

DO NOT

XXXX

JPEG

DCIM



.jpg

DCIM

XXXXX

XXXX



.jpg



.jpg

Guide

Quick Start

2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.

Automatic drive select function

[DVD-V] [VCD]

≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically

≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is

Note

≥When using DVD-RAM or DVD-R, remove the disc from the

≥[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side

Inserting the USB memory

≥Before inserting any USB memory to

≥Check the orientation of the USB

≥Insert an USB device while the unit is

Removing the USB memory

≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory

≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may

switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.

automatically selected.

cartridge. Cartridge discs cannot be used.

of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it over.

Inserting/removing the USB memory

this unit, ensure that the data stored therein has been backed up.

connector and insert it straight in.

stopped, so the “USB device” screen is displayed. Select an item and press [OK] to switch to the USB-related operations (> 35, 56, 57).

straight out.

be damaged.

∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc

Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.

DO DO NOT

∫ Handling precautions

≥Be careful about scratches and dirt. ≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc

warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)

≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt

pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.

≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static

electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.

≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers. ≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them. ≥Do not use the following discs:

– Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels

(rental discs, etc.).

– Discs that are badly warped or cracked. – Irregularly shaped discs, such as

heart shapes.

≥Do not place in the following areas:

– In direct sunlight. – In very dusty or humid areas. – Near a heater. – Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature

(condensation can occur).

– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.

≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases

when you are not using them.

DO NOT

VQT3C69

Watching Television

Basic operations

Numbered buttons

Colour buttons

e.g.

e.g.,

Current page

number

Colour button

bar

Date/time

e.g.

VQT3C69

This DVD recorder supports analogue broadcasting, digital terrestrial broadcasting and CATV broadcasting with H.264/MPEG-4 AVC and MPEG-2 codec. But HD broadcasts are downconverted to SD video when this unit receives them.

CH



DRIVE

SELECT

DELETE

SKIP

STOP

STATUS

V A

OPTION

AUDIO

REC

ヵユヹヵ



VOL

INPUT

SELECT

SLOW/SEARCH

PAUSE

PAUSE LIVE TV

MANUAL SKIP

CHAPTER

-10s

EXT LINK

REC MODE

STTL

DISPLAY

PAGE

ShowView

PROG/CHECK

PLAY/x1.3

EXIT

RETURN

+60s

DIRECT TV REC

TIME SLIP



CH

STATUS

,,,

OPTION

DISPLAY

STTL

TEXT

Preparation

1 Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connections to this unit.

2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.

Select the channel

1 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.

Everytime you change the channel of digital broadcasts, digital channel information appears automatically. ≥You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.

Press the numbered buttons and press [OK].

“D” means digital broadcasts.

Select the channel from Channel List

Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the channels you watch often. (> 64, Favourites Edit)

1 While watching TV

Press [OK].

Channel List is displayed.

Channel List

1 Das Erste 2 ZDF 3 RTL Television 4 SAT.1 5 VOX 6 ProSieben 7 RTL2 8 kabel eins 9 Super RTL

RETURN

123...

1 Das Erste 15:10 Sturm der Liebe 16:00 Tagesschau

All Channels

Sorting Mode Teletext Favourite SelectMulti Video

SELECT

1: Encrypted channels are marked with a key symbol in the

corresponding table.

2: Preview of the selected channel is displayed.

(Digital broadcasts only)

3: Titles of the current programme and next programme are

displayed.

Page + Page -







2 Press the “Blue” button to select the

“Favourite Select”.

The “Favourite Select” screen changes in the following order:

[DVB-C] (and analogue broadcasts) All Channels (Except for Analogue Channels) J TV J Radio

J Analogue [DVB-T] (and analogue broadcasts)

All Channels (Including Analogue Channels) J TV J Radio J Created Favourites

§1

Only when receiving analogue broadcast signal

§2

Created Favourites > 64, Favourites Edit

§1

J Created Favourites§2 J All Channels

§2

J All Channels

3 Press [3, 4] to select the channel

and press [OK].

Image of the selected channel is displayed. Press [OK] again to exit Channel List if you select digital broadcast channels. ≥It is possible to select the channel with the numbered

buttons too.

To sort the channels in alphabetical order:

Press the “Red” button to change the sorting mode.

≥For alphabetical sorting mode, skip backwards or forwards by a

letter with [2, 1].

To switch to the Multi Video screen§:

1 Press the “Yellow” button.

≥The additionally available sub-channels of the selected channel

are displayed.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the sub-channel and press [OK]. 3 Press [OK] again.

≥Press the “Yellow” button to return to the Channel List.

Only for channels broadcasting in Multi Video.

Note

≥Alphabetical sorting of the created Favourites is not possible in the

Channel List.

≥The Channel List is not displayed while recording, except with

High-Speed Copy.

≥Timer Recordings of Multi Video channels always record the main

channel.

≥“Locked” is displayed on the preview screen when selecting the

programme on which “Child Lock” works.

To show subtitle (Digital broadcast only)

When “Subtitle” appears in digital channel information (> 17)

Press [STTL ].

≥Press again to hide the subtitle. ≥Programmes are recorded with subtitle when you record them with

the subtitle displayed (> 19).

To sh ow

You can enjoy Teletext broadcasting, including news, weather forecasts and subtitles, if this service is provided by the broadcasters. ≥You can check if the programme has Teletext information.

“TXT” is indicated on the digital channel information (> 17).

Basic Teletext viewing

Tele text

(Digital broadcast only)

1 While viewing the programme

Press [TEXT ].

Teletext screen appears.

DO 13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 100 ZDFtext

2 Follow the on-screen instructions.

You can use the numbered buttons, the cursor buttons [3, 4, 2, 1] and the coloured buttons.

To exit the screen

Press [TEXT ].

Using Teletext conveniently

(Normal)

(Top)

(Bottom)

Appears when updating is completed.

Broadcast

After performing step 1 (> 16, right column)

Press [OPTION] and press the corresponding colour button.

Reveal hidden data

Displays the hidden messages. (e.g., quiz page answers)

Press the “Red” button.

≥Press the “Red” button again to hide messages.

2 Select “DVB Multi Audio” or “DVB

Subtitles”.

For DVB Multi Audio

1 Press [3, 4] to select the “Sound” menu and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Multi Audio” and press [1].

For DVB Subtitles

1 Press [3, 4] to select the “Other” menu and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Subtitles” and press [1].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the language.

Change the screen size

You can change the Teletext screen size.

Press the “Green” button.

≥Each press of the “Green” button changes the display.

View temporarily a TV programme while the Teletext screen is being displayed

Press the “Yellow” button.

≥Press the “Yellow” button again to return to the update page.

View sub page

If there are one or more sub pages, then the corresponding sub pages can be displayed.

1 Press the “Blue” button. 2 Enter a 4-digit number of

≥You can also select the sub page with [2, 1]. ≥It may take some time for searching, during which time you can

Note

≥The Teletext data received may not be displayed appropriately. ≥If a lot of Teletext information is available, then it may take a while

to be displayed.

≥Characters of the Teletext can be changed with “Teletext Character

Set” in “Display” of the Setup menu. (> 68)

When there are multiple audio or subtitle in the current channel, you can select a language.

1 Press [DISPLAY].

DO 13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ZDFtext

the desired sub page with the numbered buttons. Sub page is displayed.

watch TV (> above).

DO 13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ZDFtext

To select a language for DVB multi audio or DVB subtitle (Digital broadcast only)

Digital channel information

While stopped

Press [STATUS ] to show the information screen.

    

1 Das Erste

ZDF-Mor

19:00 - 19:30

Encrypted.

 

1 Programme name and

Broadcast time

2 Channel and Station Name 3 Progress of the current

programme

4 Signal Quality (> below) 5 Category (Favourite > 64) 6 Change the category 7 During scrambled

broadcasting (pay-TV etc.) This is indicated in: White: Can view Yellow: Cannot view Insert CAM with a certified Smart Card (> 6).

8 Te l e te x t ( > 16)

To switch information of the current programme and the next programme

Press [2, 1].

To show detailed information about the programme

Press [STATUS ]

To hide the information screen

Press [STATUS ] once or twice.

Signal Quality

No Signal: The digital broadcast signal is not being received. No Service: No broadcasts are currently available.

If “No Signal” is displayed:

≥Check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly

broadcasting.

Note

You can also select the other channel when the information screen is displayed by pressing [3, 4] and [OK].

∫ If the Child Lock message appears

If you set the “Child Lock” in the “Tuning” of the Setup menu (> 66) to prevent your children from viewing inappropriate programmes, the following message may appear.

This channel is locked. Press OK to enter PIN. Approved for children older than XX years.

To unlock this channel temporarily

1 Press [OK].

numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN.

2 Press [OK].

∫ If New Channel Message appears (> 65)

When a DVB channel is added, this unit will be informed automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you select “Yes” on the display, “Auto Setup” starts (all channel settings are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.) ≥The display/hide setting can be changed (> 65, New Channel

Message).

No Signal

NOW

Multi Audio

All Channels

18:53

Change Category

Locked

info

SubtitleTXT



9 NOW:

Information about the current programme NEXT: Information about the following programme

: Programme is broadcast in

multi-channel sound (> left) To change the audio language (> 66, DVB Preferred Language)

; Locked (> 66) < Subtitle (> 16) = To display detailed information

(> below) CAM Upgrade Info (> 72)

again (only when “info ” is displayed).

A confirmation screen appears

and press the

Basic

operations

VQT3C69

Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs

Numbered buttons

Refer to “Advanced playback” (> 32) for detail information.

 OPEN/CLOSE





VOL

INPUT

SELECT

PAUSE

PAUSE LIVE TV

MANUAL SKIP

-10s

EXT LINK

PAGE

ShowView

PROG/CHECK

SLOW/SEARCH

PLAY/x1.3

EXIT

RETURN

+60s

DIRECT TV REC

(PLAY)

RETURN

DRIVE

SELECT

,,,

OPTION

DRIVE

SELECT

DELETE

SKIP

STOP

STATUS

OPTION

AUDIO

REC

CHAPTER

REC MODE

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connections to this unit.

≥Turn on this unit.

Note

≥During recording, timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby,

this unit cannot play discs that do not match the “TV System” (PAL/ NTSC) (> 69) setting. Set “TV System” to match the discs before playing them.

≥When playing back a title recorded on HDD, ensure that you match

the “TV System” (PAL/NTSC) setting to the recorded title (> 69).

≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen,

pictures, sound, etc. to start.

≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you

may not always be able to control play as described in these operating instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.

∫ When a menu screen appears on the television

[DVD-V]

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [OK]. ≥Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons. ≥If you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the menu

screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].

[VCD]

Press the numbered buttons to select the item.

e.g., 5: [0] > [5] 15: [1] > [5]

≥To return to the menu screen

[DVD-V]

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Menu” and press [OK].

[VCD]

Press [RETURN ].

Note

≥Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫]

when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television screen and so on.

≥If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry screen

may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN and press [OK].

1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the

HDD or DVD drive.

The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.

2 If you selected the DVD drive

Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to open the tray and insert a disc.

≥Press the button again to close the tray.

3 Press [1](PLAY).

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] Play starts from the most recently recorded title. [DVD-V] [VCD] Play starts from the point specified by the disc.

[CD]

Play starts from the beginning of the disc.

∫ Resume play function

[HDD]

If you play the title that was viewed once, the title is played back from the point you have last stopped. To start playing the title from the beginning, refer to “To play the title from the beginning [HDD]” (> 33) ≥Resume play function for discs > 32, Operation during play

Menu operation for other type of contents

≥DivX (> 35) ≥MP3 (> 36) ≥Still pictures (JPEG) (> 37) ≥Music on HDD (> 34) ≥Music CD (> 34)

VQT3C69

Recording television programmes [HDD]

Numbered buttons

e.g.

32:35

65:11

130:25

260:04

Recording Mode

Rec Mode Remain

≥To record sound using

LPCM (XP mode only): Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the Setup menu (> 68).

Refer to “Notes for recording” (> 22) for detail information.

PAGE

ShowView

PROG/CHECK

PLAY/x1.3

EXIT

RETURN

+60s

DIRECT TV REC

TIME SLIP

REC



CH



REC MODE

AUDIO

REC

STTL



DRIVE

SELECT

DELETE

SKIP

STOP

STATUS

OPTION

AUDIO

REC

ヵユヹヵ

CH



VOL

INPUT

SELECT

PAUSE

PAUSE LIVE TV

MANUAL SKIP

CHAPTER

-10s

EXT LINK

REC MODE

STTL

DISPLAY

SLOW/SEARCH

3 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.

REC

Recording will take place on open space on the HDD. Data will not be overwritten. ≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during

recording.

≥You can record while the unit is in standby for timer

recording. However, once the time for the timer recording to begin is reached, any recording taking place will stop and the timer recording will begin.

≥[Analogue] When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”

(> 67), you can change the audio being received by pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (This operation does not affect the audio of the recordings.)

∫ To pause recording

Press [;].

Press again to restart recording. You can also press [¥ REC] to restart. (Title is not split into separate titles.)

∫ To stop recording

Press [∫].

≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.

Note

≥If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry screen

may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN and press [OK].

≥If you record programmes on which “Child Lock” works partially,

PIN code entry is required when playing back the recordings.

≥When recording a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that

is not being received correctly, the digital channel information (> 17) is also recorded and remains visible during playback.

≥If you try to record recording prohibited programmes, “$” is

displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.

Basic

operations

This function is only for recording on HDD.

≥You cannot record TV programmes directly to the disc.

Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs. (> 22)

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connections to this unit.

≥Turn on this unit. ≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

1 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.

≥You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.

Press the numbered buttons and press [OK].

“D” means digital broadcasts.

2 Press [REC MODE] to select the

recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).

≥Recording modes and approximate recording/copying times

(> 23)

e.g.,

When recording digital broadcast with subtitle or multiple audio

If a programme to record has subtitle or multiple audio, you can record with subtitle or selected audio.

To record with subtitle

Before start recording, press [STTL ] to

show the subtitle.

If the programme has multiple subtitle, select the desired language (> 17).

≥Subtitle cannot be switched after recording.

To record with the selected audio

Before start recording, select the desired language for audio (> 17).

To specify a time to stop recording— One Touch Recording

During recording

Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select the recording time.

≥You can specify up to 4 hours later. ≥The unit display changes as shown below.

OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00 ^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}

≥This does not work during timer recordings (> 20, 26) or while

using Flexible Recording (> 24).

≥This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not operated

for approximately 5 minutes after completing One Touch Recording, if “Auto Standby after OTR” is set to “On” in the Setup menu. (Default setting: “On”) (> 71)

To cancel

Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter appears. ≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording

continues.

To stop recording

Press [∫].

VQT3C69

Timer recording [HDD]

e.g.,

e.g.

Timer Recording

30:24 SP

HDDRemain

Mode

Stop DriveStartChannel Date

STTL

17:30 18. 10. TUE OFF

1 Das E

Programme Name

HDD

19:30 20:00 20:30

I.Y. SOS

D.I.Y. SOS



Timer icon

Refer to “Advanced timer recording [HDD]” (> 26– 31) for detail information.



DRIVE

SELECT

DELETE

SKIP

STOP

STATUS

OPTION

AUDIO

REC



VOL

INPUT

SELECT

SLOW/SEARCH

PAUSE

PAUSE LIVE TV

MANUAL SKIP

CHAPTER

-10s

EXT LINK

REC MODE

PAGE

ShowView

PROG/CHECK

PLAY/x1.3

EXIT

RETURN

+60s

DIRECT TV REC

GUIDE



,,,

This function is only for recording on HDD.

≥You cannot record TV programmes directly to the disc.

Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs. (> 22)

See also “TV Guide system” (> 9) and “Notes for recording” (> 22).

Depending on the type of broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to record. ≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.

(Each daily, weekly or series programme (> 31) is counted as one programme.)

Note

You cannot switch subtitles during timer recording.

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit

the connections to this unit.

≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 70).

Using the TV Guide system to make timer recordings

1 Press [GUIDE].

TV Guide:

Landscape

Wed 12.10.

1 Das Erste

ZDF-Morgenmagazin

4:30-5:30

Time:

Das Erste ZDF

RTL Television

ABC VOX

ProSieben

RTL2

SELECT RETURN

4:30 5:00 5:30 6:00 6:30

ZDF-Morgenmagazin

Gute Zei

Frühstücksfernsehen Vera

St. Tro Eine himmlische Was für ein Zirkus

Lebe deine

Informerci

+24 hours

OPTION: Free Word Search info

Punkt 6

Guide

Change Display Mode

Rote Rosen

Volle Kanne - Sevice tägl

StarWars - Episode I: Die dunkle

Frauentausch

All Types

Prog. Type

Wed 12.10.11 04:32

All Channels

Deutschland singt

Wege zu

Mein Bab Die Kind

Category

Page Page

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

programme and press [OK].

When the timer recording setting screen appears, press [OK]. ≥The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is

displayed.

When “Selection Screen” screen appears > 20, Timer recording [HDD], step 2

Note

≥The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas.

This function does not work properly unless the information which distinguishes the programme type and categories sent from broadcast stations is correct.

≥TV Guide data of up to 50 channels can be displayed in each

category (All Channels, TV, Radio or Favourite, etc. (> 64)).

To return to the previous TV Guide list before you have selected the programme type or categories

Select “All Types” of the programme type and “All Channels” of the categories in step 2 above.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

TUE 11.10.11. 12:53:00

Analogue : ARD

≥Make corrections if necessary using [3, 4, 2, 1]

(> 26, step 3).

≥When “-- ---” appears in the “Channel” column, you cannot

set timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired programme position. After you have entered the information of a TV station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.

≥When “Channel” is selected, you can press the “Blue” button

to change the category [e.g., All Channels, TV, Radio, Analogue ([DVB-C]), Favourite (> 64)] and then press [3, 4] to select the channel you want to record.

4 Press [OK].

The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is displayed.

“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated.

Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings. Press [Í] to turn the unit off.

Advanced

operations

VQT3C69

Advanced timer recording [HDD]



Changing the Settings and Editing TV Guide for Analogue broadcasts

Note

≥To change the settings of the TV Guide for digital broadcasts

(> 71)

≥Information for digital channels is not displayed in the TV Guide for

the analogue broadcasts.

Changing the settings

You can change the basic settings for your GUIDE Plus+ list.

1 Press [GUIDE]. 2 Press [OPTION]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and

press [OK].

12.1. Wed 15:05

Postal Code

Host Channel

Data Download

Night Download

RETURN

Setup

XXXXX

EUROS

4 Press [3, 4] to select an item and

press [OK].

Postal Code

Host Channel

Data Download

Night Download

To enter the Postal Code

The entry of the Postal Code is required to receive regional data.

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. 2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] or the numbered buttons to

enter your Postal Code and press [OK].

To change the Host Channel manually

The GUIDE Plus+ System information is transferred via the Host Channel. The “Auto” setting is recommended. A Host Channel is then set by the system automatically.

1 Press [3, 4] to select the desired station and

press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. ≥The setting of the Host Channel can take some time.

≥To check the host channels of your country

> right, Host Channel

To download GUIDE Plus+ data manually

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. The update can take approximately 2 hours. ≥For further information > 10, TV Guide data

download

To select the priority during midnight

The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded at 2:50 AM every day. It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download. If the GUIDE Plus+ data download at 2:50 AM and a timer recording overlap, you can select which will be given priority.

On: Data Download

Timer recording does not start or is interrupted for data download.

Off: Timer programming

GUIDE Plus+ data will not be downloaded. After recording finishes, we recommend you to change this setting to “On”.

Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].

∫ Host Channel

(As of December, 2010)

Country Host Channel Display of the Host Channel

Germany Eurosport EUROS Austria Eurosport EUROS

Note

≥Which channels appear in the GUIDE Plus+ list depends on local

reception conditions. Sub-optimum reception quality can result in missing or incomplete GUIDE Plus+ data.

Editing TV Guide

After performing steps 1-2 (> left)

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Editor” and

press [OK].

12.1. Wed 15:05

Name

WDR

***04 ***05

ARD ZDF

***06

RETURN

On/Off

On On On BBC1 BBC1

Editor

Reference

TF1 On TF6 On

FR6 ESPRT On Euros

ARD

- - - -

ARTE On

Source

Tuner Tuner Tuner

Tuner Tuner Tuner Tuner Tuner

PAGE+



4 Press [3, 4] to select the desired

“Name” and press [1].

You can also press [WXCH] to browse through the station list.

On/Off To select the stations to be displayed on the

Reference To set the appropriate Reference manually

programme list.

Only stations set to “On” are displayed in the GUIDE Plus+ list.

Press [3, 4] to change the “On/Off” settings and press [OK].

If “No Data” appears in the GUIDE Plus+ list for a station, this station is either not supported by the GUIDE Plus+ data or a GUIDE Plus+ Reference could not be clearly assigned (“----” appears in the Reference field of this station). In this case, set the appropriate Reference manually. You can also manually assign the appropriate Reference even if a station name was not recognized (e.g. ***06).

12.1. Wed 15:05

Landscape

12.1 Wed

15:05~16:05

Time:

ARD ZDF RTL

SAT1

***06

PRO7

MDR

TIMER REC

RETURN

7th Heaven

15:00

Abenteuer...

Ta... ...

Derrick Das Familiengericht Richterin Barbara Sa... ...

7th Heaven

Abenteuerurlaub

+24 hours

GUIDE

Prog. Type

All Types

15:30 16:00 16:30

Fliege-Die Talkshow

Bianca-Wege...

Heute in ...

Das Jugendgericht Richter Alexander...

Gilmore...

No Data

Display Mode

Aktuell

OPTION

Prog. Type

PAGEPAGE+

...



Press [3, 4] to change the “Reference” setting of the appropriate station and press [OK].

Note

The station names in the Reference list can deviate from the station list.

VQT3C69

Note

≥Existing information can be lost by changing the Postal Code or

Host Channel.

≥Entry of the wrong Postal Code or Host channel can lead to the

receipt of wrong or no data.

≥To change the settings, release the unit from recording standby

(> 26).

Instructions/notes on this page are only applicable to those who use the GUIDE Plus+ system for Digital terrestrial broadcasts.

≥For more information about the GUIDE Plus+ system, refer to “TV

Guide system” and “TV Guide data download” (> 9, 10).

[DVB-T] Series recording

You can record all the episodes of a series by setting just one timer recording using the GUIDE Plus+ system.

After performing steps 1-2 (> 20)

1 While “Selection Screen” is displayed,

Press [3, 4] to select “Series Timer Rec.” and press [OK].

Selection Screen

Tue 11.10.11 12:54

Tue 11.10.11



View Single Timer Rec.

Series Timer Rec.

Delete

RETURN

Series Info

2 Press [OK].

This unit automatically records the programmes that are identified to be of the same series by the GUIDE Plus+ data.

∫ To check the schedule of the series

Press the “Blue” button in the “Selection Screen“.

Tue 11.10.11 12:54



Series Information

Name Date Contents

5.12. Wed 21:30-22:30

12.12. Wed 21:30-22:30

19.12. Wed 21:30-22:30

26.12. Wed 21:30-22:30

3. 1. Wed 21:30-22:30

Decameron 1

Decameron 2

Decameron 3

Decameron 4

Decameron 1

ABC1

[DVB-T] Useful functions in GUIDE Plus+ system

Searching using the information of Series recording programmes on HDD

1 During play or while stopped, press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title. 3 Press [OPTION]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “TV Guide Explorer” and press [OK]. 5 Press [3, 4] to select “Series Timer Rec” and press [OK].

> Go to step 2. (> left)

Viewing

1 Press [GUIDE]. 2 Press [OPTION].

≥While the advertisement information is not captured, “Enter

Words” screen is displayed. (> 28, Searching by entering words)

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Advert”, then press [OK].

The advertisement screen is displayed.

≥Some advertisements are for future programmes and you can set

the timer recording of the programmes using the advertisement screen. Follow the on-screen instructions.

≥To display the latest advertisement, you will need to update the

information. To update the information continuously, this unit must be left in standby mode at night.

≥If advertisement is not displayed correctly, check the correct post

code is entered in the Setup menu (> 71, Post Code).

To change advertisements

Press [3, 4].

advertisement in the TV Guide system

Advanced

operations

:The episode to be recorded

The same icon is also displayed on the GUIDE Plus+ list.

:Repeat programme

Note

≥The series recording will be cancelled if there has been no episode

of the series for 13 weeks.

≥Titles recorded using series recording are bundled and displayed

as a “group” in the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 33) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.

≥If the same episode has already been set for series timer recording

at a different time or on another channel, “Series Timer Rec.” will not be selectable in the “Selection Screen”.

≥If the unit cannot record the first run, the unit will record the repeat

programme if it is available. However, this unit will not record the repeat programme, if any part of the first run is recorded.

≥You cannot change Channel, Date and Drive in the timer recording

setting screen. You can set the start time earlier and the end time later by some minutes, up to a maximum of 10 minutes.

≥“-------” is displayed on a series recording item in the timer

recording list if there will be no episode of the series for the next 8 days. We recommend you delete the “-------” item after you confirm the last episode of the series is recorded.

VQT3C69

Advanced playback

e.g., English is selected.

Operation during play

≥Depending on the media, some operations may not be possible. ≥Refer to “Playing music” for playing music. (> 34)

Stop

Pause

Skip

Starting from a selected title

Quick View

[HDD] [RAM]

Slowmotion

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]

Press [∫].

The stopped position is memorized.

Resume play function

Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.

Stopped position

[HDD] : Stopped position for each title is memorized. ≥To play the title from the beginning [HDD] > 33

Discs : Only previous stopped position is memorized. The position is cleared if the tray is opened. ≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is

cleared in some cases.

≥([VCD] and DivX) The position is cleared if the

unit is turned off.

Press [;].

Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

Press [6] or [5].

≥The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R]

[+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play. ≥Audio is heard during first level search

forward. DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels of search.

During play or while paused, press [:] or [9].

Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to play.

≥Each press increases the number of skips. ≥DivX : Press [:] to return to the beginning

of the title currently playing.

Press the numbered buttons.

Play starts from the selected title, chapter or track.

≥[HDD] and DivX

e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [5] 15: [0] > [1] > [5]

≥Other discs

Input a 2-digit number e.g., 5: [0] > [5] 15: [1] > [5]

≥This works only when

stopped (the screen on the right is displayed on the television) with some discs.

≥[VCD] (with playback control)

If you press the numbered buttons while stopped (the above screen is displayed on the television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play time appears on the unit’s display.)

Press and hold [1](PLAY/a1.3).

Play speed is quicker than normal. ≥Press again to return to normal speed.

While paused, press [6] or [5].

The speed increases up to 5 steps.

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play. ≥[VCD] Forward direction [5] only. ≥The unit will pause if slow-motion play is

continued for approximately 5 minutes (excluding [DVD-V] [VCD]).

Frame-byframe

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]

Skipping the specified time (Time Slip)

[HDD] [RAM]

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

(This function does not work with finalised discs.)

[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Manual Skip

[HDD] [RAM]

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

(This function does not work with finalised discs.)

[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Create Chapter

(> 42, Chapter) [HDD] [RAM]

While paused, press [2] (2;) or [1] (;1).

Each press shows the next frame. ≥Press and hold to change in succession

forward or backward.

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play. ≥[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.

1 Press [TIME SLIP]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the time

and press [OK].

Play skips the specified time. ≥Each time you press [3, 4], the time

increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1-minute intervals. (Press and hold for 10-minute intervals.)

This automatically disappears after approximately 5 seconds. To show the screen again press [TIME SLIP] again.

5 min

1-minute skip function:

Press [MANUAL SKIP +60s].

Each time you press, play skips forward approximately 1 minute.

10-second skip back function:

Press [MANUAL SKIP -10s].

Each time you press, play skips backward approximately 10 seconds.

Press [CHAPTER].

Chapters are divided at the point pressed. ≥Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a

chapter.

≥Chapters cannot be created during EXT LINK

standby.

Changing audio during play

Press [AUDIO].

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD], DivX and analogue broadcast

LR>L>R ^---------------}

HDD

PLAY

L R

e.g., “L R” is selected

[DVD-V]

You can change the audio channel number each time you press the button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack language (> 60, Soundtrack).

Soundtrack

Note

You cannot change the audio type in the following cases. ≥When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R

DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.

≥When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP

Recording” is set to “LPCM” (> 68).

≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The default setting

is “On” > 67).

1 ENG Digital 3/2.1ch

VQT3C69

Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR

All Titles PICTURE/MUSIC

Table Display

“Table Display” or “Thumbnail Display” “Grouped Titles” or “All Titles” [HDD]

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

10.10.

HDD

MUSIC

PICTURE

VIDEO

11.10.

DolphinsChantal Show

(in Thumbnail Display)

DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Titles

ARD 10.10. FRI

007

- - - - - -

HDD

- - -

ARD 18.10. SAT

009

ARD 11.10. SAT

008

MUSIC

PICTURE

VIDEO

(in Thumbnail Display)

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them. You can also sort the titles or edit the Groups of titles.

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title

and press [OK].

You can also select titles with the numbered buttons (All Titles screen only).

e.g., [HDD]

5: [0] > [0] > [5] 15: [0] > [1] > [5] 115: [1] > [1] > [5]

e.g., [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

5: [0] > [5] 15: [1] > [5]

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. ≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons

[ Currently recording.

Title protected.

Title that was not recorded due to recording protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)

t Title cannot be played

[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is damaged etc.]

Title with copyright protection (> 85, CPRM)

Groups of titles ([HDD] only)

Title that was recorded but has not yet been played ([HDD] only)

Titles that are restricted from viewing by Child Lock function ([HDD] only) (> 66)

(NTSC)

(PAL)

Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance

“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles” [HDD] “Table Display”/“Thumbnail Display”

1 While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed

Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

e.g.,

Title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV system currently selected on the unit. ≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit

(> 69).

To sort the titles for easy searching

[HDD] (All Titles screen in Table Display only)

This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback from many titles.

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

If you select an item other than “No.” ≥The DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen will reappear after playback

of the selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles continuously.)

≥Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being

played back.

≥If you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, or switch to

another DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, the sort will be cancelled.

To play grouped titles [HDD]

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OK]. 2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press [OK].

To edit the group of titles [HDD]

[HDD] (Grouped Titles screen only)

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title or a group and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary titles. ≥Press [;] again to cancel.

2 Press [OPTION]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select the option and press

[OK].

Create Group:

Press [2, 1] to select “Create” and press [OK]. Selected titles are bundled to form a group.

Release Grouping:

Press [2, 1] to select “Release” and press [OK]. ≥When a group of titles has been selected, all the titles in the group

are released.

≥When a title in a group has been selected, the title is released from

the group.

∫ Regarding the group name

The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

HDD

10.10.

11.10.

DolphinsChantal Show

OPTION OPTION

RETURN

Page 02/02

Select

VIDEO

PICTURE

To change the group name

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Name” and press [OK]. 4 Enter the name. (> 50, Entering text)

≥Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will

not be changed.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

MUSIC

HDD

Dolphins Dolphins 2

RETURN

ARD 18.10. SAT ARD 11.10. SAT

Page 01/01

Select

Info

Create Group

Release Grouping

VIDEO

Advanced

operations

Grouped Titles screen

Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly or series timer recording mode are bundled and displayed as one item.

Select the item marked with and press [OK] to display the bundled titles.

All Titles screen

Displays all titles.

Note

This function is only available for Videos and not available for music or still pictures.

To play the title from the beginning

[HDD]

You can start playing back the title from the beginning while the resume play function is activated.

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play from beginning” and press

[OK].

VQT3C69

Playing music

To play music CD

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

1 Insert a music CD.

The menu is automatically displayed.

Play Music

Copy Music

SELECT

RETURN

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”

and press [OK].

The music CD starts playing back.

You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 5: [0] > [5] 15: [1] > [5]

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR]. Playback continues.

To play music recorded on HDD

Copying music to HDD (> 58)

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to select “MUSIC”.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the album and

press [OK].

You can also select the album with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [5] 115: [1] > [1] > [5] 15: [0] > [1] > [5]

3 Press [3, 4] to select the track and

press [OK].

You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [0] > [5] 115: [0] > [1] > [1] > [5] 15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5] 1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]

Useful functions during music play

Operations during play

Stop

Pause

Skip

Repeat Play

[HDD]

Sort

[HDD]

Properties

[HDD] [CD]

Press [∫].

The stopped position is memorized.

Resume play function

Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position. ≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is

cleared.

≥Discs: The position is cleared if the tray is

opened or the unit is turned off.

≥[HDD] The position is cleared if the unit is turned

off.

Press [;].

Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

Press [6] or [5].

The speed increases up to 5 steps. Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play. ≥Audio is heard during all levels of search.

During play or while paused, press [:] or [9].

Skip to the track you want to play. ≥Each press increases the number of skips.

You can select the item which you want to repeat.

While playing

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play Setting”

and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK]. ≥Select “Off” to cancel repeat play.

You can change the order of the Album View alphabetically.

While Album View screen is displayed

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “Album Name” and

press [OK].

To cancel the sorted screen

Press [3, 4] to select “No.” and press [OK].

While Track View screen is displayed

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” and press

[OK]. ≥To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].

VQT3C69

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Note

≥You cannot play music tracks on HDD while recording or copying.

Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)

Disc

View Pictures ( JPEG )

Play Music ( MP3 )

Play Video ( DivX )

USB device

Video ( DivX ) Picture ( JPEG ) Music ( MP3 )

USB device

View Pictures ( JPEG ) Start Slideshow Copy New Pictures ( JPEG ) Copy All Pictures ( JPEG ) Copy Selected Pictures ( JPEG )

0 : Resume play function (> 32)

F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.

You cannot select folders that contain no compatible files.

Showing the menu screen

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]

1 Insert the disc. 2 If the menu screen appears, press [3, 4] to select the item and

press [OK]. e.g., [CD]

Copy Music ( MP3 )

[USB]

1 Insert the USB memory. 2 Press [3, 4] to select a file type and press [OK].

e.g.

3 If the menu screen appears, press [3, 4] to select the item and

press [OK]. e.g., Picture

∫ Showing the menu with FUNCTION MENU

Display

e.g. selecting a file to play

1 Press [RETURN ] several times to exit the menu. 2 Press [FUNCTION MENU]. 3 [-R] [-R]DL] [CD]

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Playback” and press [OK]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select file type and press [OK].

[USB]

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Drive Select” and press [OK]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select file type and press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select the item (“Play Video ( DivX )”, “View

Pictures ( JPEG )” or “Play Music ( MP3 )”) and press [OK].

Playing DivX video contents

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:

is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official

DivX DivX Certified

device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer onto DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.

1 Show DivX Menu screen.

(@ left, Showing the menu screen)

RETURN

No.

001 ABC.avi

Folder1 : 00025

Title Name

Page 001/001

Tree

Total Title : 001

DivX Menu

CD (DivX)

≥Files are treated as titles. ≥Press [1] (PLAY) if the DivX Menu screen is not displayed.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and

press [OK].

Play starts on the selected title. ≥You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [5]

15: [0] > [1] > [5]

To stop playing

Press [∫].

To show other pages

Press [:, 9].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Note

≥Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from

showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to adjust the aspect through the TV.

≥Successive play is not possible. ≥Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD drive

or the DVD drive.

Using the tree screen to find a folder

1 While the file list is displayed

Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display the tree screen.

Advanced

operations

DivX Menu

CD (DivX)

Folder

12.02.2009 Image001

Image002 Image003 Image004 Image005 Image006 Image007 Image008 Image009 Image010

DATA1 DATA2

RETURN

F 1/21

2 Press [3, 4] to select a folder and press [OK].

The file list for the folder appears.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

VQT3C69

Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)

10 alphanumeric characters

DivX Registration screen before registration

001 Both Ends Freezing 002 Lady Starfish 003 Life on Jupiter 004 Metal Glue 005 Paint It Yellow 006 Pyjamamama 007 Shrimps from Mars

1 : My favorite

2 3 4 5 6 7

Total Track

Tree

G 1 T 1 TOTAL 1/111

MP3 Menu

0 9

–

Number

Group No.

Prev.

Selected group

G: Group No. T: Track No. in the group TOTAL:

Track No./Total tracks in all groups

Tree

G 7/25

001 My favorite 001 Brazilian pops 002 Chinese pops 003 Czech pops 004 Hungarian pops 005 Liner notes 006 Japanese pops

007 Mexican pops

008 Philippine pops

MP3 Menu

Number

G 8 T 14 TOTAL 40/111

MP3 music

–

0 9

Regarding DivX VOD content

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:

This DivX Certified purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration.

Display the unit’s registration code.

(> 71, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)

Setup

Tuning

Disc Picture Sound Display Connection Others

≥After playing DivX VOD content for first time, the registration code

is not displayed.

≥If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code

different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this content.

Cancel the unit’s registration

(> 71, DivX Registration) Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” in “DivX Registration”. Use the deregistration code to cancel the registration in www.divx.com.

Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of times

Some DivX VOD contents can only be played a set number of times. When you play this content, the number of times already played and initially playable number of times is displayed.

≥The remaining number of plays decreases each time a programme

is played. However, when playing from the point where play was previously stopped, the remaining number of plays does not decrease due to the resume play function.

Note

≥Video images of the copyright-protected DivX contents stored on

USB device can be output only through the HDMI output terminal.

device must be registered in order to play

DivX Registration

You must register this unit to play protected DivX videos. The registration code is necessary to register this unit.

Registration Code : XXXXXXXXXX

Please register at www.divx.com/vod/

RETURN

Playing Music files

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.

You cannot play MP3 files on the USB memory while recording or copying.

≥

1 Show MP3 Menu screen.

(> 35, Showing the menu screen)

≥Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and

press [OK].

Play starts on the selected track.

≥“0” indicates the track currently playing. ≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [0] > [5]

15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5]

To stop playing

Press [∫].

To show other pages

Press [:, 9].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Using the tree screen to find a group

1 While the file list is displayed

Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display the tree screen.

Selected group No. /Total groups

If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.

VQT3C69

You cannot select groups that contain no compatible files.

2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press

[OK].

The file list for the group appears.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

Playing still pictures

Album View screen

Regarding Album View screen > right

Sample pictures > right

e.g., HDD

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

≥You cannot play still pictures while recording or copying.

1 Show Album View screen.

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] (> 35, Showing the menu screen) [HDD] [RAM] While stopped 1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive. 2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View

HDD

001

- - -

RETURN

002

Total 20--.--.--

- - -

Page 01/01

OPTION

VIDEO

MUSIC

PICTURE

- - -

Total 3

Date: 1. 2.2006Sample

- - -

Slideshow

Select All Playlist View

DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons

Picture and folder protected

Album that has not yet been viewed ([HDD] [RAM])

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. ≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

album and press [OK].

You can also select album with the numbered buttons. e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [5]

15: [0] > [1] > [5] 115: [1] > [1] > [5]

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View

HDD

Album Name

103__DVD

0001

0002 0003 0004

0005 0006 0007 0008

0009

---- ---- ----

Page 001/001

OPTION

RETURN

PICTURE

Slideshow

3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still

picture and press [OK].

You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons. e.g.,

5: [0] > [0] > [0] > [5] 115: [0] > [1] > [1] > [5] 15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5] 1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]

≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture. ≥Useful functions during still picture play (> 38)

To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

∫ Regarding Album View screen

Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM. You can arrange these still pictures and create an album (> 46).

[HDD] [RAM]

Grouped by date

002

Date: 10.10. 2010

Total 68

Number of pictures/Shooting date

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

Album

002

Zoological park

Total 24 10.10. 10

Shooting date/Number of pictures/ Album name

≥Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the PC

etc., the information about the recording date may not be displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].

Note

Sample pictures

Sample JPEG pictures are pre-installed on HDD of this unit. You can

≥

play them back or start slideshow (

below) with them. If you want to delete sample pictures, perform “Cancel Protection” and then delete them. (> 46)

Start Slideshow

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval with favourite music.

1 While the Album View (Playlist (Picture)) screen is

displayed

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.

2 Press [1](PLAY).

You can also start Slideshow by pressing [OPTION] and press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow” and then press [OK].

To select multiple albums for starting Slideshow:

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album. 2 Press [;].

A check mark appears. ≥Press [;] again to cancel the selection.

3 Repeat steps 1-2 until you select all necessary albums. 4 Perform step 2.

To select all albums for starting Slideshow:

1 Press [∫] in step 1. 2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. 3 Perform step 2.

[USB]

To start Slideshow on the menu screen:

1 Insert the USB memory.

The menu is automatically displayed. (> 35)

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow”, and press [OK].

Note

≥Sample Music is selected for default Background Music, which is

played with Slideshow. Refer to “Slideshow Settings” to turn off or change the Background Music. (> 38)

Advanced

operations

VQT3C69

Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)

Shooting date

e.g., HDD

Useful functions during still picture play

Slideshow Settings

While the Album View (Playlist (Picture)) screen is displayed (> 37)

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Slideshow

Settings” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture

Settings” or “Background Music Settings” and press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [2, 1]

to select the setting. After finishing settings, press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Set” and press [OK].

Picture Settings

Please set the following functions.

Display Interval Repeat Play Random

Display Interval: Selects the desired interval. (“Normal”,

Repeat Play: Selects “On” to play pictures in the selected

Random: Selects “On” to play pictures in the selected

Background Music Settings

Please set the following functions.

Background Music Random Music Selection

Background Music:

Random: Selects “On” to play Background Music at random. Music Selection:

Note

≥Music albums on HDD, a disc and a USB memory can be used as

the Slideshow Background Music. However, when selecting still images on a disc or a USB memory for the slideshow, music albums on the same media cannot be used as the Background Music. (Even if a music album on the same media is selected, the music is not played.)

≥“Sample Music” cannot be deleted or changed to other files. ≥“Music Selection” setting turns back to “Sample Music” when

removing media on which specified Background Music is recorded or deleting specified Background Music files.

≥DTS-CD cannot be played back as Slideshow Background Music. ≥“Rotate RIGHT/Rotate LEFT” or “Zoom in/Zoom out” does not work

during Slideshow.

Normal

Off

SELECT

SetSet Cancel

RETURN

“Long” or “Short”)

album repeatedly.

album at random.

Off

Sample Music

SELECT

SetSet Cancel

RETURN

Selects “On” to play Slideshow with Background Music. Selects “Off” to play Slideshow without Background Music.

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Music Selection” and

press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the storage location of

Background Music and press [OK]. ≥“Sample Music” is Background Music pre-

installed on HDD.

3 Press [3, 4] to select an album for

Background Music and press [OK] when selecting other than “Sample Music”.

Start Slideshow

Slideshow Settings

Rotate RIGHT/Rotate LEFT

While playing

1 Press [OPTION]. 2Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate

RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and press [OK].

Rotate RIGHT

Rotate LEFT

RETURN

≥Rotation information will not be stored.

– [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Still pictures – When disc or album is protected – When played on other equipment – When copying pictures – When changing date

Zoom in/Zoom out

While playing

1 Press [OPTION]. 2Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in”

and press [OK].

≥To return the picture to its original size, press

[3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and press

Rotate RIGHT Rotate LEFT

Zoom in

RETURN

[OK].

≥When zooming in, the picture may be cut off. ≥The enlargement information will not be stored. ≥The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures

smaller than 640 a 480 pixels.

Properties

While playing

Press [STATUS ] twice.

18:53:50 11.10.

Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006 Date 1. 1. 2011 No. 3 / 9

To exit the picture properties screen

Press [STATUS ].

VQT3C69

Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)

You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using “HDAVI Control” or Q Link.

What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?

VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating instructions for connected equipment for operational details.

≥VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions

provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other manufacturers’ equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.

≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 5” function.

“HDAVI Control 5” is the newest standard (current as of December, 2010) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible equipment. This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI equipment.

≥Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’

equipment supporting VIERA Link function.

Preparation

1 Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable and a fully

wired 21-pin Scart cable (> 7), or to your receiver using an HDMI cable (> 7).

2 Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (> 69). (The default setting is “On”.)

What you can do with “HDAVI Control” and Q Link

[VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]

3 Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment

(e.g., TV).

≥Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be

used as “HDAVI Control”.

4 Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this

unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI Control” function works properly.

Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this procedure.

What is Q Link?

Q Link is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit and a Panasonic TV. You can use this function by connecting the equipment with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.

Preparation

≥Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

(> 6).

For your reference

The following systems from other manufacturers have similar function to Q Link from Panasonic. For details, refer to your television’s operating instructions or consult your dealer.

≥Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic) ≥DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz) ≥Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips) ≥Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig) ≥SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)

Easy playback

When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to HDMI input mode ([VIERA]Link]) or AV input mode ([Q]Link]) and the TV displays the corresponding action. (Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)

Press [FUNCTION MENU]

§2

, [1](PLAY)§3, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [ShowView], [PROG/CHECK] etc.

Power on link

When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and displays the corresponding action. (Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)

Press [FUNCTION MENU]

≥[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] SVCD and MP3

The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.

§2

, [1](PLAY)§3, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [ShowView], [PROG/CHECK] etc.

Power off link

When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is automatically set to standby mode even if the FUNCTION MENU etc. is displayed during playback or when the unit set to a timer recording. Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time when recording, copying, finalising etc. ≥When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver will also turn off.

Direct TV Recording

This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the TV.

≥Depending on the TV type connected with this unit, this function may not work.

Press and hold [¥ DIRECT TV REC] for 1 second.

Recording starts. ≥The titles are recorded to the HDD.

To stop recording

Press [∫]. ≥If you switch TV channels while using Direct TV Recording, the Direct TV Recording may stop. ≥When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display (> 25), Direct TV Recording is unavailable.

§1

[VIERA]Link] This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.

§2

This button is available only when this unit is on.

§3

When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents from where playback started. In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback started.

Note

≥These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition. ≥About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.

§1

Advanced

operations

VQT3C69

Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)

Menu Drive Select

Control Panel

Top Menu

FUNCTION MENU

e,g.,

Control Panel

Easy control only with VIERA remote control

[VIERA]Link]

If you connect this unit to the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient functions. You can operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control. The buttons that you can use for this unit vary depending on the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV. Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.

≥The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press incompatible buttons on the TV remote control. ≥The TV displays the TV tuner’s picture when the linked operation is finished.

Using the FUNCTION MENU to operate this unit

Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.

§1

1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” using the TV remote control.

≥If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.

2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV remote control, and press [OK].

≥About the FUNCTION MENU Display (> 5, 41, 68).

Pause live TV programme

You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand. If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.

Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.

§2

1 When you want to pause the TV programme

Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the TV remote control.

≥This unit turns on automatically.

2 When you want to resume

Display the Control Panel (> below) and press [OK].

≥The TV programme resumes.

To stop Pause Live TV

1 Press [4] while the Control Panel is displayed. 2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

(> 41, To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV)

Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit

By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (> below) and display the Top Menu for DVD-Video.

1 Press [OPTION].

Note

You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top Menu for DVD-Video is displayed and while DVD-Video is being copied.

2 Select an item then press [OK].

Channel List

Switch to TV

Control Panel Control Panel is displayed (> below).

FUNCTION MENU FUNCTION MENU is displayed (> above).

Top Menu [DVD-V] Top menu is displayed (> 18).

Menu [DVD-V] Menu is displayed (> 18).

Standby Settings “Standby Settings” screen is displayed

Drive Select Select the HDD or DVD drive

Slideshow “Album View” screen is displayed (> 37).

Rotate RIGHT (JPEG) Rotate LEFT (JPEG)

Zoom in (JPEG) Zoom out (JPEG)

§1

§3

Channel List is displayed (> 16)

Displayed when watching with the tuner of this unit. It will return to the TV picture.

(> 70).

Rotate the still picture (> 38).

Enlarge or shrink the still picture (> 38).

VQT3C69

∫ Using the Control Panel

Using the Control Panel, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote control. Select “Control Panel” and press [OK] in step 2 (> above). The Control Panel is displayed (> right). ≥When playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.

–[3]: Pause, [4]: Stop, [2]: Search backward, [1]: Search forward, [OK]: Play, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.

≥While playing still pictures

–[4]: Stop, [2]: View previous picture, [1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.

§1

This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later.

§2

This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.

§3

Displayed only when selecting “View” in the FUNCTION MENU.

∫ When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode

Press [Í] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.

∫ When not using “HDAVI Control”

Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (> 69).

Play

ause

Sto

Exit

Convenient functions

FUNCTION MENU Display

By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main functions quickly and easily. If “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu, FUNCTION MENU automatically appears when you turn the power on. (> 68)

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of disc.

HDD

FUNCTION MENU

Playback

Recording Delete

Copy

View

Others Drive Select

RETURN

Remain

Video Picture Music

30:00 SP

2 Press [3, 4] to select a function and

press [OK].

FUNCTION MENU

HDD

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

View

Others Drive Select

RETURN

≥If you press [RETURN ], you can return to the previous

screen.

Remain

Video

Picture Music

30:00 SP

3 Press [3, 4] to select an item and

press [OK].

≥Refer to “Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION

MENU Display” about each function. (> 5)

To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV

You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand. If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.

1 Turn on the television and select the

appropriate AV input to suit the connections to this unit.

2 Turn on this unit and press [WXCH]

to select the channel.

3 When you want to pause the TV programme

Press [PAUSE LIVE TV].

HDD



4 DVB

ABC

L R

This icon indicates that Pause Live TV is working. You can turn off this icon (> 68, Pause Live TV Icon).

4 When you want to resume

Press [1](PLAY).

≥The programme is saved on the HDD in SP recording mode

(> 23) regardless of the recording mode and the drive selected before starting saving.

≥At least 1 hour up to 8 hours of TV programmes can be

temporarily saved on the HDD. (This may vary depending on the HDD free space.)

Advanced

operations

To exit the FUNCTION MENU

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Operation during Pause Live TV

Pause

Quick View

Slowmotion

Press [6, 5].

Press [;].

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart.

Press and hold [1](PLAY/a1.3).

≥Press again to return to the normal speed.

While paused, press [6] or [5].

The speed increases up to 5 steps. ≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

Stop Pause Live TV

1Press [∫]. 2Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”

and press [OK].

Note

≥The Pause Live TV function automatically stops when a timer

recording starts.

≥The Pause Live TV function does not work

– when the clock is not set – while recording – while timer recording – while EXT LINK recording, etc.

≥Audio or Subtitle cannot be switched during resume play. ≥The first 30 minutes is deleted every 30 minutes after the HDD is

full or the saving lasts 8 hours.

≥The Pause Live TV function stops automatically 24 hours after

started.

≥“DVB Multi Audio” and “DVB Subtitles” of on-screen menu cannot

be switched during Pause Live TV.

≥If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry screen

may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN and press [OK].

≥“Pause Live TV” does not work while viewing recording prohibited

programmes.

VQT3C69

Editing titles/chapters

Editing

Title View screen

Refer to “Title operations” (> 43).

Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance (> 33)

≥Playing still pictures (> 37) ≥To play music recorded on HDD (> 34)

To edit the group of titles [HDD] (> 33) > below

To search programmes on TV Guide (> 28)

e.g.,

Refer to “To play the title from the beginning [HDD]” (> 33).

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

Chapter View

008 11.10. Dinosaur

HDD

0:31.24

Chapter View screen

Refer to “Chapter operations” (> 43).

VQT3C69

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (You cannot edit finalised discs.) [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Chapter

Each section between the division points becomes a chapter.

Title

Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter

[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a Playlist (Video) (> 44).

“Chapter Creation” in the Setup menu (> 67)

“Automatic”:

Detects changes (special mute points like the start and the end of the programme) in the scene during recording and sets chapter start points on them automatically. ≥Depending on the programme to be recorded or the Recording

Mode, the chapter start points may not be created correctly.

“5 minutes”:

Sets chapter start points automatically during recording at approximately 5-minute interval.

≥The maximum number of items on a disc:

[HDD]

– Titles: 499 – Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title (Depends on the state of recording.) [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] – Titles: 99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles) – Chapters: Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254) (Depends on the state of recording.)

Note

≥Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot

be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.

≥You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc. ≥Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.

dividing a title etc).

≥[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the

free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount of free space decreases. We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.

Editing titles/chapters and playing chapters

You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded programmes.

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connection to this unit.

≥Turn the unit on. ≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded

title to be edited.

≥[RAM] Release protection (> 62, Setting the protection).

1 During play or while stopped

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

HDD

10.10. 11.10.

OPTION

RETURN

008

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. ≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

Multiple editing

Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.) A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

VIDEO

MUSIC

PICTURE

Select Info

Page 02/02

3 Press [OPTION]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation

and press [OK].

≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and

press [OK].

Enter Title Name

Play from beginning

Delete Properties

Edit

Find Titles Create Group Release Grouping Chapter View Table Display All Titles PICTURE/MUSIC

∫ If you select “Chapter View”

Set up Protection Cancel Protection Partial Delete Change Thumbnail Divide Title

5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

chapter.

To start play > Press [OK]. To e dit > Step 6.

VIDEO

≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (> left)

6 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select

the operation and press [OK].

Delete Chapter

Create Chapter Combine Chapters Title View

≥You can go back to Title View.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Title operations

Properties

No.

Channel

Date

026

ARD

10.10.2011

Time Rec time

12:19 0:30 (SP)MON

Dinosaur

Approved for children older than 16 years.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete

Start

Finish

0:43.21

PLAY

008

End

- -:- -.- - - -:- -.- -

Start End

HDD

VIDEO

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

Change Thumbnail

Change

Finish

0:00.00

- -:- -.- -

Change

HDD



008

Start play and select the image

of a thumbnail.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title

Preview

Finish

0:43.21

PLAY

008

Divide

HDD

VIDEO

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter

Create

Finish

0:43.21

PLAY

008

HDD

After performing steps 1–4 (> 42)

Delete

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

Properties

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding. ≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete

titles.

≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded

title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted (> 21).

Information (e.g., time and date) is shown. ≥Press [OK] to exit the screen.

Enter Title Name

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

Set up Protection Cancel Protection

[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

Partial Delete

[HDD] [RAM] (> below, For your reference)

Change Thumbnail

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

(> below, For your reference)

Divide Title

[HDD] [RAM] (> below, For your reference)

Multiple editing is possible.

You can give names to recorded titles. (> 50, Entering text)

≥[HDD] Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will not be changed.

If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.

You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.

1 Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the

section you want to delete.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].

≥Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections.

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title View.

1 Press [1] (PLAY) to start play. 2 Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a

thumbnail is shown.

To change the thumbnail

Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at the point you want to change.

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].

You can divide a title into two.

1 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK]. 3 Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [OK].

To confirm the division point

Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays 10 seconds before and after the division point.)

To change the division point

Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the point where you want to divide the title.

Note

≥The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (> 85) of the original title. ≥Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out. ≥[HDD] Divided titles form a group of titles.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Tit

HDD

007 008

ARD 10.10. FRI ARD 11.10.

VIDEO

Editing

Chapter operations

After performing steps 1–6 (> 42)

Delete Chapter

[HDD] [RAM]

Create Chapter

[HDD] [RAM] (> below, For your reference)

Combine Chapters

[HDD] [RAM]

Multiple editing is possible.

For your reference

≥Use Search (> 32), Time Slip (> 32) to find the desired point. ≥To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (> 32) and Frame-by-frame (> 32). ≥To skip to the start or end of a title/chapter, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding. ≥Select “Combine Chapters” (> below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.

(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)

Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the title.

VIDEO

1 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.

≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].

Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [OK].

≥The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.

VQT3C69

Creating, editing and playing Playlists (Video)

Playlists Playlist View ( Video )

- -

Create

HDD

- -

- - - -

- -

Playlists Playlist View ( Video )

- -

Create

HDD

- -

- -- -

- -

You can arrange the chapters (> 42) to create a Playlist (Video).

Title Title

Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter

Playlist (Video)

Chapter

Copying (> 51) a Playlist (Video) will create a title. ≥Playlists (Video) are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use

much capacity.

≥Editing chapters in a Playlist (Video) does not modify the source

titles and source chapters.

≥You cannot create or edit Playlists (Video) while recording or

copying.

[HDD] [RAM] ≥The maximum number of items on a disc:

– Playlists (Video): 99 – Chapters in Playlists (Video): Approx. 1000 (Depends on the state of recording.)

≥If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the

items entered will not be recorded.

Creating Playlists (Video)

[HDD] [RAM]

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connection to this unit.

≥Turn the unit on. ≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded

title to be edited.

≥[RAM] Release protection (> 62, Setting the protection). ≥Playlists (Video) must be made in accordance with the encoding

system currently selected in “TV System” (> 69).

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and

press [OK].

FUNCTION MENU

HDD

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

View

Others

Drive Select

RETURN

[HDD]

When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.

Remain

Playlists

Flexible Rec HDD Management Setup

30:00 SP

VIDEO

PICTURE

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”

and press [OK].

VIDEO

PICTURE

5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title

and press [4].

≥Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then skip to

step 7.

HDD

Source Title

001

Source Chapter

001

Chapters in Playlist

RETURN

Create

001 ARD 11.10. SAT

002

002 003

---

OPTION

VIDEO

Page 001/001

------

Page 001/001

---

Page 001/001

---------

Press RETURN to finish.

Playlists

6 Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you

want to add to a Playlist (Video) and press [OK].

Press [3] to cancel.

HDD

Source Title

001

Source Chapter

001

Chapters in Playlist

RETURN

Create

001 ARD 11.10. SAT

002

002 003

OPTION

VIDEO

Page 001/001

------

Page 001/001

---

Page 001/001

------------

Press RETURN to finish.

Playlists

≥You can also create a new chapter from the source title.

Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter” and press [OK] (> 43, Create Chapter).

7 Press [2, 1] to select the position to

insert the chapter and press [OK].

HDD

Source Title

001 002

Source Chapter

001

Chapters in Playlist

RETURN

Create

001 ARD 11.10. SAT

002 003

VIDEO

------

---

------------

Page 001/001

Playlists

≥Press [3] to select other source titles. ≥Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.

8 Press [RETURN ].

All the selected scenes become the Playlist (Video).

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

VQT3C69

Editing and playing Playlists (Video)/

Create

- -- -

- -- -- -

12.10. SUN 0:30

HDD

Playlists Playlist View ( Video )

Playlist View ( Video ) screen

Refer to “Playlist (Video) operations”. (> right)

Playlists Chapter View

11 12.11. SUN 0:11

001

--- ---

--- ------ ---

002

HDD

0:19.36

0:10.24

Chapter View screen

Refer to “Chapter operations”. (> right)

Properties

Dinosaur

Playlists Move Chapter

Previous Page 01/01 Next

11 12.11. SUN 0:11

001

--- ---

--- ------ ---

002

HDD

0:10.240:10.24

0:19.36

VIDEO

chapters

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] (Play only)

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and

press [OK].

[HDD]

When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

Playlist (Video).

To start play > Press [OK]. To edit > Step 5.

VIDEO

PICTURE

≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (> 42)

5 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select

the operation and press [OK].

≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and

press [OK].

e.g. [HDD]

Playlist (Video) operations

After performing steps 1–5 (> left)

Delete

[HDD] [RAM]

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK]. Once deleted, the Playlists (Video) are lost and cannot be restored.

Make certain before proceeding.

Properties

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]

Create

Playlist (Video) information (e.g., total time and date) is shown.

≥Press [OK] to

exit the screen.

(> 44, Creating Playlists (Video), Step 5–8)

[HDD] [RAM]

Copy

[HDD] [RAM]

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press [OK].

≥The copied Playlist (Video) becomes the

newest one in “Playlist View ( Video )” screen.

Enter Name

You can give names to Playlists (Video). (> 50, Entering text)

[HDD] [RAM]

Change

(> 43, Change Thumbnail)

Thumbnail

[HDD] [RAM]

Multiple editing is possible.

No.

Date Total10002

11.10.2011 TUE

Chapters 0:30.53

Create

Copy

Delete

Properties

Edit

Chapter View

PICTURE

Enter Name

Change Thumbnail

∫ If you select “Chapter View”

6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

chapter.

To start play > Press [OK]. To edit > Step 7.

VIDEO

≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (> 42)

7 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select

the operation and press [OK].

Add Chapter

Move Chapter Create Chapter Combine Chapters Delete Chapter Playlist View

Chapter operations

[HDD] [RAM] After performing steps 1–7 (> left) ≥Editing chapters in a Playlist (Video) does not modify the source

titles and source chapters.

Add

(> 44, Creating Playlists (Video), Step 5–7)

Chapter

Move Chapter

Create

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position to insert the chapter and press [OK].

(> 43, Create Chapter)

Chapter

Combine

(> 43, Combine Chapters)

Chapters

Delete Chapter

Multiple editing is possible.

(> 43, Delete Chapter) The Playlist (Video) itself is deleted if you

delete all the chapters in it.

Editing

≥You can go back to Playlist View ( Video ).

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

VQT3C69

Editing still pictures and music

Start Slideshow/Slideshow Settings (> 37, 38)

Album (still picture) and picture operation (@ right)

Switch to Playlists (Picture) (> 48)

Properties

Change Date

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Album View

Delete Pictures

Album (still picture) and picture operation (> right)

You can go back to Album View.

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] (JPEG)

≥You can edit pictures and albums. ≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-

≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on finalised DVD-R.

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive. ≥[RAM] Release protection (> 62, Setting the protection).

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

2 Editing an album:

3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation

∫ To edit the album

∫ To edit still picture

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

VQT3C69

Editing still pictures (JPEG)

RW and USB memory.

[HDD] [RAM] When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.

Select the album to be edited and press [OPTION].

≥When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,

press [OPTION] without selecting album.

Editing a still picture:

1 Select the album which contains the still

picture to edit and press [OK].

2 Select the still pictures to edit and press

[OPTION].

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. ≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

Multiple editing

Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.) A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

To select all albums

Press [∫]. After confirmation message appears, press [2, 1] to select “Yes”.

and press [OK].

(e.g., [HDD])

Start Slideshow Slideshow Settings

Add Pictures

Create Album

Edit Album

Copy to DVD

Playlist View

VIDEO/MUSIC

(e.g., [HDD])

Delete Album

Change Date

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Album (still picture) and picture operation

After performing steps 1–3 (> left)

Delete Pictures

Delete Album

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] (JPEG)

Change

Date

[HDD] [RAM]

Enter Album Name

[HDD] [RAM]

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

[HDD] [RAM]

Properties

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

Add Pictures

Create Album

[HDD] [RAM]

Copy to

DVD

[HDD]

Copy to

HDD

[RAM]

Multiple editing is possible. [Change Date : Only when the “Picture (JPEG) View” screen is displayed]

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are

lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.

≥When deleting an album, files other than the

still picture files inside the album will also be deleted. (This does not apply to folders under the album concerned.)

≥[-R] Available space does not increase even

after pictures are deleted.

You can change the date of the picture.

1 Press [2, 1] to select the item and press

[3, 4] to change.

2 Press [OK].

You can give names to albums. (> 50, Entering text) ≥Album names input using this unit may not be

displayed on other equipment.

If set, this will protect the still picture or album from

accidental deletion.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR P

HDD

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

The lock symbol appears when the still picture or album is protected. ≥Even if the protection setting is used by this

unit to protect an album, the album may be deleted by another unit.

Information (e.g., image size and file size) is shown. ≥To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” or “Yes”

and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album

that contains the still picture you want to add and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press

[OK].

≥If “Select pictures to copy” is selected:

Select the still picture you want to add and press [OK].

≥If “Copy all pictures” is selected:

All the still pictures in the album will be copied.

4 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and

press [OK].

≥If you want to continue copying, select

“Yes” and go to step 2.

Only for “Create Album” 5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and

press [OK].

≥If “Yes” is selected:

You can give names to albums. (> 50, Entering text)

≥If “No” is selected:

The album name is automatically given.

For copy to DVD-RAM or HDD

Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].

For copy to DVD-R

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press [OK].

≥[-R]

Use blank discs or unfinalised discs on

which JPEG images are recorded with this unit.

Album Name

0001

103

0002

Note

≥Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to

play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 33)

≥Playing still pictures (> 37)

Album and track operation (> below)

Useful functions during music play (> 34)

You can go back to Album View

Album and track operation (> below)

≥Timer recordings do not start when performing “Change Date”,

“Copy to DVD”, “Copy to HDD”, “Add Pictures” or “Create Album”.

≥[RAM]

“Add Pictures” is available only for the folders conforming to DCF.

≥If you want to delete sample pictures, perform “Cancel Protection”

and then delete them. (> 46)

≥“Sample Music” is not displayed on the MUSIC screen.

Editing music

[HDD]

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to select “MUSIC”.

2 Editing an album:

Press [3, 4] to select the album and press [OPTION].

Editing a track:

1 Press [3, 4] to select the album and press

[OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and press

[OPTION].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation

and press [OK].

∫ To edit the album (Music)

Delete Album

Enter Album Name

Repeat Play Setting

Track View

Sort

VIDEO/PICTURE

> below

∫ To edit the track (Music)

Delete Track

Properties

Enter Track Name

Enter Artist Name

Repeat Play Setting

Album View

Deleting still pictures and music using DELETE Navigator

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] (JPEG)

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture” or

“Music”.

≥[RAM] [-R] (JPEG) “Music” is not displayed.

4 Press [OK]. 5 Deleting an album

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [DELETE ¢].

Deleting a still picture or track

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album

which contains the still picture or track to delete and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture

or track and press [OK].

You can confirm the item that you have selected using the option menu. ≥Refer to option menu operations

– for Still pictures > 46, step 3 – for Music @ left, step 3

To show other pages [Album (still picture) and still picture only]

Press [:, 9] to show other pages.

Multiple deleting [Album (still picture) and still picture only]

Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.) A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

6 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and

press [OK].

The item is deleted.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Editing

Useful functions during music play (> 34)

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Album and track operation

After performing steps 1-3 (> above)

Delete Album Delete Track

Enter Album Name Enter Track Name

Enter Artist Name You can edit the artist name of the track.

Note

≥When the timer recording starts, editing music stops on the way.

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK]. ≥Once deleted, the recorded contents

are lost and cannot be restored. Make

certain before proceeding.

You can give names to albums and tracks. (> 50, Entering text)

(> 50, Entering text)

VQT3C69

Creating, editing and playing Playlists (Picture)

Still picture Still picture Still picture Still picture Still picture

Album 1 Album 2

Playlist (Picture)

Still picture Still picture Still picture

Playlists Playlist View ( Picture )

- -

HDD

- - - -

PICTURE

VIDEO

Playlists Playlist View ( Picture )

- -

Create

HDD

- -

- - - -

- -

You can arrange favourite still pictures in albums stored on HDD to create a Playlist (Picture).

Copying (> 56) a Playlist (Picture) will create an album. (Background Music cannot be copied.)

≥Playlists (Picture) are not recorded separately so this doesn’t

use much capacity.

≥Editing still pictures in a Playlist (Picture) does not modify the

source albums or source still pictures.

≥You cannot create or edit Playlists (Picture) while recording or

copying.

≥The maximum number of Playlists (Picture):

– Playlists: 99 – Pictures in a Playlist (Picture): Approx. 3000

Creating Playlists (Picture)

[HDD]

You can create Playlists (Picture) with Background Music.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and

press [OK].

FUNCTION MENU

HDD

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

View

Others

Drive Select

RETURN

When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.

Remain

Playlists

Flexible Rec HDD Management Setup

30:00 SP

6 Press [2, 1] to select the still picture

you want to add to a Playlist (Picture) and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. ≥Press [;] again to cancel.

HDD

001 Date :25.5.2009

Source Albums

001

Source Pictures

0001

Pictures in Playlist

RETURN

OPTION

Create

002

0002 0003

----

View

PICTURE

Page 001/001

------

Page 001/001

----

Page 001/001

------------

Press RETURN to finish.

Playlists

7 Press [OK]. 8 Press [2, 1] to select the position to

insert the still picture and press [OK].

HDD

001 Date :25.5.2009

Source Albums

001

Source Pictures

0001

Pictures in Playlist

----

RETURN

Create

002

0002

----

PICTURE

Page 001/001

------

Page 001/001

0003

----

Page 001/001

--------

Playlists

≥Press [3] to select other “Source Albums” and repeat steps

5–8 to add pictures in other albums.

9 Press [RETURN ]. 10 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” if you

want to name the Playlist (Picture).

Create

Input playlist name ?

Yes

SELECT

(> 50, Entering text)

RETURN

11 Select the Background Music if you

want to change Background Music.

≥If “No” is selected, Sample Music is set for Background

Music.

Create

Sample music is now selected. Change background music?

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”

and press [OK].

VIDEO

PICTURE

Press [2,1] to select an album (a folder) in “Source Albums” and press [4].

≥Press [OK] to select all still pictures in the album, then skip

to step 8.

≥Press [3] to cancel.

HDD

001 Date :25.5.2009

Source Albums

001

Source Pictures

0001

Pictures in Playlist

----

RETURN

Create

002

0002 0003

----

Press RETURN to finish.

Page 001/001

------

Page 001/001

----

--------

PICTURE

Page 001/001

Playlists

VQT3C69

Yes

SELECT

RETURN

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the storage location of Background

Music and press [OK]. ≥“Sample Music” is Background Music pre-installed on

HDD.

3 Press [3, 4] to select an album for Background Music

and press [OK] when selecting other than “Sample Music”. ≥Background Music on Playlists (Picture) is specified for

each Playlist (Picture). (> 49)

All the selected pictures become a Playlist (Picture).

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Editing Playlists (Picture)/still pictures

Playlist (Picture) operations (@ right)

right

Album (still picture) and picture operation (> 46)

Creating, editing and playing Playlists (Video) (> 44)

Properties Add Pictures Move Pictures Delete Pictures

Playlist View

Still picture operations (@ right)

You can go back to Playlist View ( Picture ).

[HDD]

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and

press [OK].

≥When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button

to select “PICTURE”.

4 Editing a Playlist (Picture):

Select the Playlist (Picture) to be edited and press [OPTION].

Editing a still picture:

1 Select the Playlist (Picture) which contains

still pictures to edit and press [OK].

2 Select the still pictures to edit and press

[OPTION].

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. ≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

Multiple editing

Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.) A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

5 Press [3, 4] to select the operation

and press [OK].

∫ To edit the Playlist (Picture)

Start Slideshow Slideshow Settings

Delete

Edit

Copy to DVD

Album View

VIDEO

Create

Copy

Enter Playlist Name

Playlist (Picture) operations

[HDD]

≥After performing steps 1–5 (@ left)

Start Slideshow

Slideshow Settings

Delete

Copy to

DVD

(> 37, Start Slideshow, Steps 1-2) ≥You cannot select multiple Playlists

(Picture) or all Playlists (Picture).

(> 38, Slideshow Settings) ≥Slideshow Settings are retained only for

the specified Playlist (Picture).

≥Music CD (CD-DA) is used for Background

Music when inserting Music CD.

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK]. Once deleted, the Playlists (Picture) are lost and cannot be restored.

Make certain before proceeding.

For copy to DVD-RAM

Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].

For copy to DVD-R

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press [OK].

≥[-R]

Use blank discs or unfinalized discs on

which JPEG images are recorded with this unit.

Create

Copy

Enter Playlist

(> 48, Creating Playlists (Picture), Step 5–

11)

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press [OK].

≥The copied Playlist (Picture) becomes the

newest one in “Playlist View ( Picture )” screen.

You can give names to Playlists (Picture). (> 50, Entering text)

Name

Multiple editing is possible.

Still picture operations

[HDD]

≥After performing steps 1–5 (@ left)

Properties

(> 46, Album (still picture) and picture operation)

Editing

∫ To edit still picture

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Add Pictures

Move Pictures

Delete Pictures

Multiple editing is possible.

(> 48, Creating Playlists (Picture), Step 5–9)

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position to insert the picture and press [OK].

Playlists Move Pictures

HDD

Playlist Name

Playlist 01

0002

0001

0:10.24

Previous Page 001/001 Next

RETURN

---- ----

---- -------- ---

PICTURE

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

VQT3C69

Entering text

Name field: shows the text you have entered

Press the “Red” button or “Green” button to select character type and press [OK].

“Standard Characters”: (> left, Alphabet characters, etc.) “Other Characters”: (> below, Umlaut characters, accented characters, etc.)

J K L

Enter Title Name

1 2 3 4 5

A B C a

D E F d

G H I g

6 7 8 9 0 b c   e f /  % h i  $

Top Menu Preview

Standard Characters Other Characters

Chapter 1_

Chapter 1

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

You can give names to recorded titles, etc. Also, you can search desired programmes on TV Guide by entering key words. (Free Word Search/Find Titles) (> 28)

1 Show Enter Title Name screen etc.

Title (timer recording)

Select “Programme Name”. (> 26, Manually programming timer recordings, step 3)

Free Word Search

Select “Free Word Search”. (> 28, “Searching by entering words”, step 2)

Find Titles

Select “Find Titles”. (> 28, “Searching using programme information of titles recorded to the HDD”, step 5)

Title

Select “Enter Title Name”. (> 42, step 4)

Playlist (Video)

Select “Enter Name”. (> 45, step 5)

Playlist (Picture)

Select “Enter Playlist Name”. (> 49, step 5)

Album of still pictures

Select “Enter Album Name”. (> 46, Editing still pictures (JPEG), step 3)

Album (CD/MP3) ([HDD])

Select “Enter Album Name”. (> 47, Editing music, step 3)

Track (CD/MP3) ([HDD])

Select “Enter Track Name”. (> 47, Editing music, step 3)

Artist (CD/MP3) ([HDD])

Select “Enter Artist Name”. (> 47, Editing music, step 3)

Disc

Select “Disc Name”. (> 62, Providing a name for a disc, step 1)

Favourite 1–4

Press the “Red” button. (> 64, To change the name of a Favourite in the “Favourite” column, step 2)

Enter Title Name

Top Menu Preview

Delete





Add to List



Name List

Set



SELECT

Standard Characters Other Characters

7 8

RETURN

12345

ABC a

DEF d

GH INOg

JKL j

PQRSp

TUV t

WXY Z w

Space

67890 bc

ef/ %

hi $ kl@

n ]

qrs( )

uv{ }

xyz

;

¢¡£¤¥

«¬

µ¶·

¿Á

ÉÊË

ÔÕÖ

ÝÞßÐ áà

çèé

стуфх

þý

¦§¨©ª ¯°± ² ¹º»¼½

ÃÄÅÆ

НОПАС

ØÙ

× Ú

вгдеж

ëìí î

ö÷ø ú

Space

È Ò

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a

character and press [OK].

Repeat this step to enter other characters.

≥To delete a character

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)

≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters

e.g., entering the letter “R”

1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row. 2 Press [7] twice to highlight “R”. 3 Press [OK].

≥To enter a space

Press [DELETE ¢] and press [OK].

P Q R

N O

3 Press [∫] (Set).

To end partway

Press [RETURN ]. Text is not added.

∫ To add a name to the list

You can add frequently used names and recall them later. Maximum number of added names: 20 Maximum number of characters per name: 44 After entering the name (steps 1-2).

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Add to List” and press [OK].

≥You can also press [9] to select “Add to List”.

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Add” and press [OK].

≥Press [RETURN ] to cancel.

∫ To recall an added name

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List” and press [OK].

≥You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be recalled and

press [OK].

∫ To delete an added name

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List” and press [OK].

≥You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be deleted. 3 Press [OPTION] to show “Delete Name” and press [OK]. 4 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK]. 5 Press [RETURN ].

For your reference

If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu after finalisation (> 63). When entering a title name, the name that will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu Preview” window.

VQT3C69

Note

≥If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens. ≥The number of characters that can be entered depends on what

kind of things you name.

Copying titles or Playlists (Video)

Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)] Advanced Copy

Features Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult

settings.

Copy direction HDD > DVD ≤ ≤

DVD > HDD – ≤

High speed mode copy

§1

≤ ≤

Changing recording mode – Finalise

§3

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

Automatically finalised

High speed mode Normal speed mode High speed mode Normal speed mode

Copying Playlists (Video)

§4

Are chapters maintained? ≤ Are thumbnails maintained? ≤ Recording or Playing while Copying

§1

To high speed copy titles (or Playlists (Video) created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (The default setting is “On”. > 67). However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.

≥

When arranging multiple titles for copying, if any titles are recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”, then you cannot perform with high-speed copy.

––≤ ≤

§5

–

§6

–

––

≥Playlists (Video) created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode. ≥Playlists (Video) mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.). ≥Titles that contain many deleted segments. ≥Titles that have been copied to the HDD from a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD (SD Video).

≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode. (Displayed ) ≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect ≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

§2

If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent

Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode

against degradation of picture quality.) [+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

§3

You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”. If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (>63

§4

You cannot copy Playlists (Video) with a play time more than 8 hours. When you copy a Playlist (Video), it will become a title in the destination drive.

§5

[RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter. [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5 minutes [+R] about 8 minutes) when finalising after copying the disc.

§6

Thumbnails return to the default position.

§7

When copying Playlists (Video), the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.

§8

Possible only with titles on the HDD

(However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation.) – You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying. – You cannot play a Playlist (Video) while copying titles with copyright protection (> 22). – Still pictures or music cannot be played.

∫ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)

(excludes time required to write data management information)

HDD

Recording

Recorded

Mode

1 hour

LP EP(6 hours) EP(8 hours)

≥

The above rated value indicates the fastest time and speed required for copying 1 hour title from HDD to each disc in the above list supporting High-Speed copying. The amount of time and speed may vary depending on the conditions such as the area on where information is written or unique feature on the disc.

§1

In this unit, copying with 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as 12X Speed DVD-R disc takes.

§2

In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, take.

§3

In this unit, copying with 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as 4X Speed DVD-RW disc takes.

§4

In this unit, copying with 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as 8X Speed +R disc takes.

Note

≥When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed. ≥Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.

Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (single-sided, Dual Layer) and +R DL (single-sided, Double Layer)

When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The titles that were temporarily copied to the HDD are then deleted. You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.

– When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When copying to a new

blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)

– When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to

be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 499 in total. When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (> 22)

5X Speed

DVD-RAM

Required

time

12 min. 5x

6 min. 10x 3 min. 20x 2 min. 30x

1 min. 30 s.

Speed

40x

12X Speed

DVD-R

Required

time

5 min. 46 s. 2 min. 30 s. 1 min. 21 s.

58 s. 62x 48 s. 75x

Speed

10x 24x 44x

4X Speed

DVD-R DL

Required

time

15 min. 7 min. 30 s. 3 min. 45 s. 2 min. 30 s. 1 min. 53 s.

Speed

8x 16x 24x 32x

4X Speed

DVD-RW

Required

time

15 min. 7 min. 30 s. 3 min. 45 s. 2 min. 30 s. 1 min. 57 s.

Make a copy list and then copy. You can set the unit to copy titles or Playlists (Video) in the way you want.

[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW] [DVD-V] (Only from a finalised disc)

You cannot perform high-speed copy with finalised discs.

[DVD-V] [+RW]

You cannot perform high-speed copy from +RW to HDD.

§2

≤

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

Can be selected

≤

§7

≤

§8

≤

§5

–

§6

–

Speed

4x 8x

16x

8X Speed

Required

time

8 min. 20 s. 3 min. 45 s. 1 min. 53 s.

Speed

16x 32x

4X Speed

+R DL

Required

time

15 min. 7 min. 30 s. 3 min. 45 s.

Speed

4x 8x

16x

4X Speed

+RW

Required

time

15 min. 7 min. 30 s. 3 min. 45 s.

24x 31x

Regarding copying of copyright-protected titles

You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (> 85) compatible DVD-RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD. ≥Titles or Playlists (Video) cannot be copied from DVD-

RAM to the HDD.

≥Titles will not be copied if they are protected (> 43). ≥You cannot copy Playlists (Video) created from copyright-

protected titles.

≥Titles with recording limitations and Playlists (Video)

cannot be registered on the same copying list.

Speed

4x 8x

16x

Editing

Copying

VQT3C69

Copying titles or Playlists (Video)

Before copying

When copying a title with main and secondary audio (Analogue broadcast only)

≥Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from

“Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 68) when: – Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),

+R, +R DL and +RW.

– When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (> 68)

and you are copying in XP mode.

∫ Speed and recording mode when copying

[HDD] ,-. [RAM] : High speed [HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the following

table.

Rec for High Speed Copy (> 67) Copy speed

Only titles recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”.

Only titles recorded with “Rec for High

High speed

Normal speed

Speed Copy” set to “Off”. When making a copy of multiple titles that

were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.

In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, copy will perform at normal speed.

≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in “EP”

or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

≥When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space. ≥When the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for

Recording” (> 67) do not match.

≥When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:

– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] – [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or “FR

(recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

Note

≥If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry screen

appears when copying. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN and press [OK]. Parental control information of the title is not copied to discs.

≥Titles and Playlists (Video) recorded using a different encoding

system (PAL or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot be copied.

≥[-R] Video cannot be copied to a disc with still pictures (JPEG)

already recorded on it.

≥[-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with video

already recorded on it.

Preparation

≥Insert a disc that you can use for copying (> 12, 15). ≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.

Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]

DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL are automatically finalised (> 85). After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.

[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] (You cannot copy to finalised discs.) When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set to FR. (However, if there is still not enough space after setting to FR mode, copy will not be performed.)

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Video (HDD to

DVD)” and press [OK].

COPY Navigator

HDD

Rec time 0:52(SP)

RETURN

Total : 0

OPTION

001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008

---

Disc Space: 4310MB All Titles

Total Size: 0MB( 0%)

Channel

Date Day

ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30 ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15 AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00 ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00

Page 01/01

Select Info

Title NameTime No.

4 Press [3, 4] to select the title you

want to copy and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. ≥Press [;] again to cancel.

To show other pages

Press [:, 9] to show other pages.

5 Press [OK]. 6 After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-

Video format), +R and +R DL discs, they become playonly and you can no longer record or edit.

Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].

Copy starts.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

∫ To stop copying (> 53) ∫ COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and

functions (> 54)

∫ To check the properties of a title and sort COPY

Navigator

1Press [3, 4] to select the title and press

[OPTION].

COPY Navigator

HDD

Rec time 0:52(SP)

RETURN

2Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”

and press [OK].

Properties:

The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are shown.

Sort (All Titles screen only): Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to display titles by No., channel, recording date, day, recording start time and title name. (You cannot select this item if a title has a check mark.) If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is cancelled.

Note

≥When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording

compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal. If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal ( Silent )” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (> 67).

≥If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title

at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them. To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and then copy the contents of the list (> 53).

Total : 0

001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008

---

Properties

Sort

Grouped Titles

OPTION

All Titles

Disc Space: 4310MB

Total Size: 0MB( 0%)

Channel

Date Day

ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30 ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15 AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00 ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00

Page 01/01

Title NameTime No.

VQT3C69

Copying using the copying list–

HDD

Create List All Titles

007

ARD 10.10. FRI

008 0:30(XP)

ARD 11.10. SAT

- - -

- - - - - - - - -

Playlists

VIDEO

Advanced Copy

[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW] > [HDD]

You can order titles and Playlists (Video) as desired for copy to disc.

See also “Before copying” (> 52).

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced

Copy” and press [OK].

Copy

Cancel All

Copy Direction

HDD DVD

Copy Mode

VIDEO High Speed

Create List

Start Copying

RETURN

≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]

several times (> step 7).

Source

HDD

Destination

DVD

Select the copy direction.

4 Set the copy direction.

≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press

[4] (> step 5).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK]. 5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].

The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.

6 Press [2] to confirm.

5 Set the recording mode.

≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press

[4] (> step 6).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press [OK]. 5 Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK]. 6 Press [2] to confirm.

6 Register titles and Playlists (Video) for

copy.

≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any

changes to it (> step 7).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].

Copy

Cancel All

Copy Direction

HDD DVD

Copy Mode

VIDEO High Speed

Create List

Start Copying

RETURN

2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK]. 3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the

“Blue” button to select “Playlists”.

OPTION

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

Size: 0MB

Name of item

No. Size

New item (Total=0)

Page 01/01

Create copy list.

( 0%)

≥When copying to a disc using high speed mode,

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “ ” or

“ ” can be registered. [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “ ” can be

registered.

≥To show other pages (> below)

5 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (> 54)

You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size” (> 54) exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity:” is not sufficient).

6 Press [2] to confirm.

7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start

Copying” and press [OK].

When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal. If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal ( Silent )” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (> 67).

8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK] to start copying.

[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press [OK].

≥If “Copy & Finalise” is selected

After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. ≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

∫ To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds. (You cannot stop while finalising)

When High-speed copying

All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.

When Normal Speed copying

Copies until the point cancelled. However as for titles with copyright protection, only titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are cancelled before the copy is complete are not copied and remain on the HDD. ≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while

temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied. However, if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.

Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of remaining writable disc space becomes less.

∫ To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

∫ Recording and playing while copying

You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying. (Only when high speed copying without finalising) ≥Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.

Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.

≥To confirm the current progress

Press [STATUS ].

Note

≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the

HDD regardless of the recording drive settings. (Only when high speed copying without finalising)

Copying

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or Playlist (Video)

and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel. ≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

≥When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab,

the check mark is cancelled.

VQT3C69

Copying titles or Playlists (Video)

COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions

COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators

(NTSC)

(PAL)

Data size of each registered item

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

No. Size

New item (Total=0)

Create copy list.

To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy.

Titles and Playlists (Video) that can be copied in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW

Titles and Playlists (Video) that can be copied in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) (However, titles and Playlists (Video) cannot be copied in high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)

[+R]DL] is displayed, but copy cannot be performed.

Title with copyright protection (> 22, Copyrightprotected TV programmes)

Titles deleted from the HDD by copyright protection after copying. (> 22, Copyright-protected TV programmes)

Titles or Playlist (Video) contains still picture(s) ≥Still picture(s) cannot be copied.

Titles or Playlists (Video) that are restricted from viewing or copying by Child Lock function ([HDD] only) (> 66)

Title or Playlist (Video) recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV system currently selected on the unit. ≥Titles and Playlists (Video) displaying these marks

cannot be selected.

Size:

Name of item

≥When copying at normal speed, the total

Data size recorded to the copy destination

(0%)

Size: 0MB

data size will change according to the recording mode.

Page 01/01

≥The total data size shown may be larger

than the sum of the data sizes for each registered item, because of data management information being written to the copy destination, etc.

∫ To edit the copying list

Select the item in step 6–5 (> 53) 1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press

[OK].

Delete All:

Delete all items registered on the copying list. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Add:

Add new items to the copying list. 1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or Playlist (Video) and

press [;]. A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. ≥Press [;] again to cancel.

2 Press [OK].

Delete:

Delete the selected items. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Move:

Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list. Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [OK].

To cancel all registered copying setting and lists

After performing steps 1–3 (> 53)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK]. 2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.

– When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the

copy source

– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,

open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

Delete All

Add Delete Move

Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL

[DVD-V] > [HDD]

You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit. While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD according to the set time. ≥If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that

portion of title is not recorded.

≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (> 67) is set to “On” and you

make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected in “Aspect for Recording” (> 67) of the Setup menu.

≥Operations and on screen displays during copy are also

recorded.

≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent

illegal copying, and cannot be copied.

≥The following cannot be copied: Video CD, Audio CD and so on.

Preparation

≥Insert the finalised disc (> 15).

After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVDVideo”) (> 53, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)

1 Set “Copy Time”.

≥If you are not going to change the setting (> step 2).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].

≥Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [OK]. 4 Press [2] to confirm.

Copy will continue until there is not enough available recording space on the HDD.

≥Setting the unit to copy according to the set time

3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].

Copy

Cancel All

Copy Direction

DVD HDD

Copy Mode

DVD-Video XP

Copy Time

Start Copying

RETURN

hour

min.

Set the time a few minutes longer.

Press OK to change the setting.

5 Press [2, 1] to select “hour” and “min.” and press

[3, 4] to set the recording time.

6 Press [OK]. 7 Press [2] to confirm.

Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after the content being played finishes.

≥Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to

include the operation time before play begins.

≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered

buttons.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start

Copying” and press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK] to start copying.

The disc top menu is displayed. ≥Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is

selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising the disc (> 63).

VQT3C69

4 When the top menu is displayed

My favorite 01/02

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3 Chapter 4

VIDEO

DVD Video Recording format

USB Cable

Video (MPEG2)

USB device

Play Video ( DivX ) Copy Video ( MPEG2 )

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title you want to start copying, and press [OK].

While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is reached.)

Copying Video (MPEG2) from a video equipment

Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been taken by a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, can be copied from the camera’s HDD to this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM. (All the recordings on the same date become a title.) ≥You cannot playback SD Video in the camera’s HDD with this unit.

You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.

≥You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To stop copying

Press [∫]. You can also press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds to stop copying. ≥If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.

Note

≥The screen on the right is recorded at the

beginning.

≥The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of

copy to the end.

≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top

menu does not display automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.

≥Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original

picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.

≥If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD Video

Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (> 53, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy).

HDD

DVD-RAM

Preparation

1 Turn on both this unit and the camera. 2 Connect the camera to this unit with USB cable. 3 Select the appropriate mode that makes the camera ready for

data transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on the camera.

≥Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.

The display automatically appears when you connect the camera to this unit. (> 35) 1 Press [3, 4] to select “Video ( DivX & MPEG2 )” and press

[OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video ( MPEG2 )” and press

[OK].

Then go to step 7 on page 53.

≥SD Video on the camera are automatically registered on the copy

list.

≥If there are no SD Video on the camera, “Copy Video ( MPEG2 )”

is not displayed.

Copying

VQT3C69

Copying still pictures/Playlist (Picture)

Copy New Pictures

Copy from

USB

Copy to

HDD

Copy

DVD

HDD

Source

Destination

Cancel All

Copy Direction

Copy Mode

Create List

DVD HDD

PICTURE

High Speed

Copy

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

No. Size

Cancel All

Picture

Copy Direction

Copy Mode

Create List

Picture/Folder

Start Copying

DVD HDD

PICTURE

High Speed

Name of item

Page 01/01

Create copy list.

New item (Total=0)

Copy

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

No. Size

Cancel All

Picture

Copy Direction

Picture/Folder

DVD HDD

Name of item

New item (Total=0)

≥

You cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R, DVD-R DL or CD-R/CD-RW.

≥When you copy a Playlist (Picture), it will become an album in the

destination drive.

Copying new still pictures on the USB memory—Copy New Pictures

[USB] > [HDD] This unit saves information about imported still pictures. Therefore, if still pictures are imported from the same USB memory, then only new still pictures will be imported.

1 While stopped

Insert the USB memory. (> 15)

The menu is automatically displayed. (> 35)

2 Press [3, 4] to select

“Picture ( JPEG )” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy New

Pictures ( JPEG )” and press [OK].

4 Set the copy direction.

≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press

[4] (> step 5).

The same drive as the copy source can be selected.

6 Press [2] to confirm.

5 Set the copy mode.

≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press

[4] (> step 6).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK].

“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.

4 Press [2] to confirm.

6 Register still pictures for copy.

≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any

changes to it (> step 7).

You can register still pictures, still picture folders or Playlists (Picture). ≥Individual still pictures and folders/Playlists (Picture) cannot

be registered on the same list.

4 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and

press [OK].

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

Note

≥This unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still pictures and

USB memories for USB device. If additional still pictures are imported, then the older information will be deleted.

≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/

folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 14), copying will stop partway through.

≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation. ≥Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the

shooting date in the HDD.

≥Only DCF-compliant USB media can be used for this function.

Copying using the copying list

[HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM] [RAM] >[HDD] [RAM]

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced

Copy” and press [OK].

∫ To register individual still pictures

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK]. 3 [HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]

Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE” Press the “Blue” button to select “Playlists”.

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press

[;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. ≥Press [;] again to cancel.

The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If you

≥

want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

≥When you switch between the “PICTURE” and “Playlists”

tab, the check mark is cancelled.

≥To show other pages (> 57) ≥To select another folder or Playlist (Picture) (> 57)

5 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (> 57)

6 Press [2] to confirm.

∫ To register on a folder by folder basis

(To register Playlists (Picture))

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder” and press [OK].

VQT3C69

≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]

several times (@ step 7).

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK]. 5 [HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]

Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”. Press the “Blue” button to select “Playlists”.

6 Press [3, 4] to select the folder or Playlist (Picture) and

press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel. ≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

≥To show other pages (> 57)

7 Press [OK]. 8 Repeat steps 4–7 until you select all necessary folders

(Playlists (Picture)).

≥To edit the copying list (> 57)

9 Press [2] to confirm.

7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start

Folder

New folder

001 100__DVD 002 101__DVD 003 102__DVD

---

New folder

Copy All Pictures

Copy from

USB

Copy to

HDD

Copying” and press [OK].

≥Only when copying individual still pictures.

When specifying another folder as the copying destination, select “Folder”.

8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK] to start copying.

9 For copy to DVD-R

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press [OK].

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

Note

≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the copy

list may not be the same at the copy destination.

≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/

folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 14), copying will stop partway through.

≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation. ≥[-R] Video cannot be copied to a disc with still pictures (JPEG)

already recorded on it.

≥[-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with video

already recorded on it.

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. ≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

∫ To edit the copying list

Select the item in step 6–5 (for a still picture) or 6–7 (for a folder or Playlist) (> 56)

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press

[OK].

Delete All:

Delete all items registered on the copying list. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Add:

Add new items to the copying list. 1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder and press

[;]. A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. ≥Press [;] again to cancel.

2 Press [OK].

Delete:

Delete the selected items. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

To cancel all registered copying settings and lists

After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Copying using the copying list)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK]. 2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.

– When a title, Playlist (Picture) or still picture has been recorded or

deleted at the copy source

– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,

open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

∫ To select another folder or Playlist (Picture)

After performing step 6–2 (> 56, To register individual still pictures) 1 [HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]

Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”. Press the “Blue” button to select “Playlists”.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OK].

Delete All

Add Delete

3 Press [3, 4] to select the folder or Playlists (Picture) and press

[OK].

Create List Picture ( JPEG )

HDD

Folder 103__DVD

0002

0001

----

RETURN

0003

----

---- ---- ----

Page

001/001

OPTION

PICTURE PICTURE

0004

--------

Create List

Playlists Playlists

HDD

RETURN

\JPEG\DCIM\101__DVD 001 100 DVD 002 101__DVD 003 102__DVD 004 103__DVD

---

OPTION

Folder

Page 01/01

Picture 0012 File 0012

You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.

≥Individual still pictures of different folders (Playlists (Picture))

cannot be registered on the same list.

≥It is convenient to create a Playlist (Picture) (> 48) if you want to

Copying still pictures on the USB memory

Copying all the still pictures

[USB] > [HDD]

1 While stopped

Insert the USB memory (> 15).

The menu is automatically displayed. (> 35)

2 Press [3, 4] to select

“Picture ( JPEG )” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy All

Pictures ( JPEG )” and press [OK].

4 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and

press [OK].

Copying using the copying list

[USB] > [HDD] [RAM]

1 While stopped

Insert the USB memory (> 15).

The menu is automatically displayed. (> 35)

2 Press [3, 4] to select

“Picture ( JPEG )” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Selected

Pictures ( JPEG )” and press [OK].

4 Perform steps 4 – 8 on “Copying

using the copying list” (> 56).

≥Another folder cannot be selected as the copying destination

on step 7.

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

Note

≥Copy Mode is fixed at “PICTURE High Speed”. ≥The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same

at the copy destination.

≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/

folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 14), copying will stop partway through.

≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation. ≥Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the

shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.

Copying

VQT3C69

Copying music to HDD

You can store the following formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.

≥Music CD (CD-DA) ≥MP3

You can copy MP3 files from the USB memory or CD-R/ CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL.

Copying music from a CD

[CD] > [HDD] All tracks on the music CD (CD-DA) are recorded on the HDD. (Cannot record track-by-track.)

≥One CD is recorded on the HDD as one album. ≥Audio quality: LPCM ≥The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300

(Depends on the remaining capacity.) If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that can be recorded will be reduced.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

1 Insert a music CD.

The menu is automatically displayed.

Play Music

Copy Music

SELECT

RETURN

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music”

and press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and

press [OK].

Recording starts.

To stop recording

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds. ≥If the recording is cancelled, then no tracks on the CD will be

recorded.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

Note

≥While recording, no other operations can be performed. Timer

recordings will not proceed.

≥Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc or

USB memory.

≥CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)

restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.

Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] (MP3) > [HDD] You can copy MP3 files recorded on USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/ DVD-R/DVD-R DL to the HDD by file or folder.

≥One folder is recorded on the HDD as one group. ≥The maximum number of albums

on HDD: 300 The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 3000 (Depends on the remaining capacity.) If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums can be recorded will be reduced.

Folders with music files (groups) copied to the HDD will be

that

treated as albums.

1 While stopped

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]

Insert the CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/ DVD-R DL (> 15).

[USB]

Insert the USB memory (> 15).

The menu is automatically displayed. (> 35)

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music

( MP3 )” and press [OK].

“Copy Direction” and “Copy Mode” are automatically set to “USB#HDD”, “DVD#HDD” or “CD#HDD” and “MUSIC High Speed”, respectively.

3 Register MP3 files for copy.

You can register MP3 files or folders. ≥MP3 files and folders cannot be registered on the same list.

Copy

Cancel All

Copy Direction

USB HDD

Copy Mode

MUSIC

High Speed

Create List

Start Copying

RETURN

∫ To register individual MP3 files

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select the MP3 file and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel. ≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

5 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (> 59)

6 Press [2] to confirm.

OPTION

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

Track/Folder

No. Size

New item (Total = 0)

Page 01/01

Create copy list.

Track

Name of item

VQT3C69

∫ To register on a folder by folder basis

Copy

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

No. Size

Cancel All

Trac k

Copy Direction

Track/Folder

USB HDD

Name of item

New item (Total=0)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Track / Folder” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK]. 5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel. ≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

6 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (> below)

7 Press [2] to confirm.

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Start

Copying” and press [OK].

≥For individual files only

When specifying an existing folder as the copying destination

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].

When creating a new folder as the copying destination

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. 2 Enter the folder name (> 50, Entering text).

5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK] to start copying.

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

Note

≥The sequence in which the MP3 files are registered on the copy list

may not be the same at the copy destination.

≥If MP3 files are already contained inside the copy destination

folder, the new MP3 files are recorded following the existing MP3 files.

≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/

folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 14), copying will stop partway through.

∫ To edit the copying list

Select the item in step 3–5 (for a MP3 file) (> 58, Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/ CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL) or 3–6 (for a folder) (@ above).

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press [OK].

Delete All:

Delete all items registered on the copying list. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Add:

Add new items to the copying list. 1 Press [3, 4] to select the MP3 file or folder and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. ≥Press [;] again to cancel.

2 Press [OK].

Delete:

Delete the selected items. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

To cancel all registered copying settings and lists

After performing steps 1–2 (> 58, Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK]. 2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Delete All

Add Delete

Copying

VQT3C69

Using on-screen menus/Status message

Setting menus

Menu Item Setting

Using on-screen menus

Common procedures

1 Press [DISPLAY].

Disc

Play Picture Sound Other

Soundtrack

Subtitles

Audio channel

Digital 2/0 ch

Off

L R

Audio attribute

LPCM/ Digital/DTS/MPEG:

k (kHz): b (bit): ch (channel):

Language

ENG: FRA: DEU: ITA: ESP: NLD: SVE: NOR:

English French German Italian Spanish Dutch Swedish Norwegian

DAN: POR: RUS: JPN: CHI: KOR: MAL: VIE:

Danish Portuguese Russian Japanese Chinese Korean Malay Vietnamese

Signal type

Sampling frequency Number of bits Number of channels

THA:

Thai

POL:

Polish

CES:

Czech

SLK:

Slovak

HUN:

Hungarian

FIN:

Finnish

¢:

Others

VQT3C69

≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,

etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you cannot select or change.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and

press [1].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and

press [1].

4 Press [3, 4] to select the setting.

≥Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].

To clear the on-screen menus

Press [DISPLAY].

Disc menu—Setting the disc content

Soundtrack

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] The disc’s audio attributes appear.

[DVD-V]

Select the audio and language (> right, Audio attribute, Language). [VCD] (SVCD) and DivX Select the soundtrack number. ≥Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one

audio type.

Subtitles

[DVD-V]

Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (> right, Language). [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only discs that contain subtitle on/off information) Turn the subtitle on/off. ≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit. [VCD] (SVCD) and DivX Turn the subtitle on/off and select “Text” or the subtitle number. ≥“Text” or subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not

multiple subtitles.

Angle

Change the number to select an angle.

Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX

(> 32, Changing audio during play)

Source Select (DivX)

≥Automatic:

≥Interlace:

≥Progressive:

PBC (Playback control > 85) [VCD]

Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.

With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using the menus (> 18) on the disc.

≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot

change when there is no recording.

[DVD-V]

The constructing method of the DivX contents is automatically distinguished and output.

Select when the disc contents were recorded using interlace.

Select when the disc contents were recorded using progressive.

Play menu—Change the play sequence

This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed. Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that can be selected will differ.

Repeat Play

≥All [CD] [VCD] ≥Chapter [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

≥Group MP3 (except [USB])

≥

PL (Playlist (Video))

≥Title [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

≥Tra ck [CD] [VCD] and MP3 (except [USB])

Select “Off” to cancel.

[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]

[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]

Picture menu—Change the picture quality

Playback NR

Reduces noise and picture degradation while playing.

≥On:

Reduces noise and picture degradation.

≥Off:

Video is played back as it is.

Input NR

Reduces the noise while recording (Except analogue channels).

≥Automatic:

Noise reduction only works on picture input from a video tape.

≥On:

Noise reduction works for input video.

≥Off:

Noise reduction is off. You can record the input signal as it is.

Sound menu—Change the DVB multi audio and sound effect

DVB Multi Audio

[Digital channel only]

If more than one audio channel is output, you can set the desired channel before recording. ≥DVB Multi Audio cannot be selected during playback or

recording.

≥Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be

selected will differ.

≥German ≥Spanish ≥Czech

≥English ≥Italian ≥Polish ≥Original

“Original” is displayed when the original language is available in a broadcast.

Dialogue Enhancer

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] and DivX

(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)

The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue easier to hear.

≥French ≥Russian ≥Turkish

Other menu—Change the DVB subtitle and display

Selected drive status/type of disc or USB memory

Channel information

Recording or play status/input channel

Selected audio type

Available recording time and recording mode

Title number and elapsed time during play/ Recording mode

Date and time

No display

Recording drive/Copy progress indicator

Title number and elapsed time during recording/ Recording mode

The remaining time appears here while stopped.

Current time

≥When using Pause Live TV

The time when the picture currently displayed on the television was broadcasted

position

DVB Subtitles

[Digital channel only]

You can set the desired subtitles if more than one subtitle track can be selected. ≥DVB Subtitles cannot be selected during playback or

recording.

≥Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be selected

will differ.

≥English ≥Italian ≥Polish ≥Original

“Original” is displayed when the original language is

≥German ≥Spa nish ≥Czech

available in a broadcast.

Position

1–5: The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu moves.

≥French ≥Russian ≥Turki sh

Status messages

Press [STATUS ].

The display changes each time you press the button.

HDD

REC

PLAY

1 DVB

ABC

L R

Copying 10%



18:53:50 11.10.

 T1 0:05.14 XP  T2 0:00.10 XP

Remain

13:50 XP

HDD and disc management

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Common procedures

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

press [OK].

FUNCTION MENU

HDD

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

View

Others

Drive Select

RETURN

30:00 SP

Remain

Playlists

Flexible Rec HDD Management Setup

Play 15:05:13

Live 15:10:46

3 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD

Management” or “DVD Management” and press [OK].

e.g., [RAM]

DVD Management

DVD-RA M

SELECT

≥When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and

“Format HDD” are displayed.

RETURN

Titles 11 Used

0 : 22

Disc Name

Disc Protection

Delete all titles

Format Disc

Remain

5:38 (EP)

Off

Setting menus

VQT3C69

HDD and disc management

My favorite 01/02

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

(

Setting the protection

[RAM]

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc

Protection” and press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

DVD Management

DVD-RAM

SELECT

The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is writeprotected.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

RETURN

Titles 11 Used

0 : 22

Disc Name

Disc Protection

Delete all titles

Format Disc

Remain

5:38 (EP)

Deleting all titles and Playlists (Video)—Delete all titles

[HDD] [RAM]

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive. ≥[RAM] Release protection (> above).

After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all

titles” and press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

A message appears when finished.

4 Press [OK].

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Note

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be

restored. Make certain before proceeding.

≥Deleting all video titles will result in all Playlists (Video) also being

deleted.

≥Still picture data (JPEG), Playlists (Picture), music data or

computer data cannot be deleted.

≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.

Providing a name for a disc

[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

You can provide a name for each disc.

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive. ≥[RAM] Release protection (> left, Setting the protection).

After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”

and press [OK].

(> 50, Entering text)

≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window. ≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is

displayed on the Top Menu.

≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other

equipment after creating top menu.

DVD Management

DVD-RAM

Note

≥[-R] Once a name is provided to a disc, it is not possible to record

still images to that disc.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Documentary

Titles 11 Used

0 : 22

Remain

5:38

Deleting all the contents—Format

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD.

Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data), and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc

even if you have set protection.

After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”

or “Format Disc” and press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

A message appears when formatting is finished.

Note

≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may

take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).

≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.

This can render the disc unusable.

4 Press [OK].

Note

≥When a disc has been formatted using this unit, it may not be

possible to use it on any other equipment.

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed. ≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit. ≥Sample pictures are restored when formatting HDD even if they

have been deleted.

VQT3C69

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Selecting the background style— Top

Display after finalising

Title Name

Thumbnail

(Still picture)

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVDVideo top menu after finalising or creating Top Menu ([+RW]).

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”

and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

background and press [OK].

≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (> 43,

Change Thumbnail)

≥[-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images

recorded on them.

Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first— Auto-Play Select

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play

Select” and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or

“Title 1” and press [OK].

Top Menu: The top menu appears first. Title 1: The disc content is played without displaying

≥[-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images

recorded on them.

Enabling discs to be played on other equipment—Finalise

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (> above) before finalising the disc.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” and

press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

A message appears when finalising is finished.

Note

≥You cannot cancel finalising. ≥Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.

([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)

≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.

This will render the disc unusable.

4 Press [OK].

Top Menu List

7 8

the top menu.

Note

When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately four times).

After finalising ≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you

can no longer record or edit.

≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting

(> 62) although it becomes play-only after finalising.

≥When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated. ≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] Chapters are created automatically

([-R] [-RW‹V›]: about 5-minute chapters/[+R]: about 8-minute chapters), if – the titles were directly recorded to the disc. – the titles were copied using any mode other than the high

speed mode.

This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode of recording.

≥There is a pause of several seconds between titles and chapters

during play.

Recording/Editing/Entering name ≤ – Play on other players – ≤

≥You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s

equipment.

≥If you finalise discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than

this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be displayed.

≥Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players

due to the condition of the recording.

Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about DVDs.

http://www.panasonic-europe.com

Before

finalising

After

finalising

Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu

[+RW]

+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW disc on other equipment.

You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.

Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (> left) before creating top menu.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top

Menu” and press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating. Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.

4 Press [OK].

Note

≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the

created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Setting menus

VQT3C69

Changing the unit’s settings

Tab s

Menus Options

You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu. ≥The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.

Common procedures

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and

press [OK].

Setup

Tuning Disc Picture Sound

Display Connection Others

Remote Control Clock Standby Settings DivX Registration TV Guide Type System Update Initialize

SELECT

DVD 1

Digital

TAB

RETURN

4 Press [3, 4] to select the tab and

press [1].

5 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and

press [OK].

6 Press [3, 4] to select the option and

press [OK].

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Tuning

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

∫ Favourites Edit

You can create four Favourites of channels for making viewing and recording easier. Editing these Favourites does not affect the channel setting itself. ≥Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the Favourite

during timer recording standby.

Press the “Green” button to select the Favourite. [DVB-C] (and analogue

broadcasts)

Favourites Editor

1 Das Erste 2 ZDF 3 RTL Television 4 ABC 5 VOX 6 ProSieben 7 RTL2 8 kabel eins 9 Super RTL

Favourite Select

123...

Favourite 1

Page +

All Channels

Sorting Mode CategoryAdd

SELECT

RETURN

≥The channels can be sorted in numerical or alphabetical order with

“Red” button.

[DVB-C] To add channels to a Favourite

1 Press the “Blue” button to select the Category.

≥Every time you press the button, you change between:

All Channels (Except for Analogue Channels) J TV J Radio J Analogue (Only when receiving analogue broadcast signal) J All Channels

2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the left column and press

the “Yellow” button. ≥Repeat this step to add other channels.

3 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

[DVB-T] (and analogue broadcasts)

All Channels

1 ABC

2 ABC HDTV 3 RTL 4 Das Erste

Sorting Mode

Page -

SELECT

RETURN

Favourites Editor

123...

Favourite Select

Favourite 1

[DVB-T] To add channels to a Favourite

1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All Channels” column

and press the “Yellow” button.

≥Repeat this step to add other channels. ≥Press the “Blue” button to add all the available channels to the

Favourite. (This function is available only when no channels have been added to the Favourite.)

2 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

To change the order of channels of a Favourite

1 Press [1]

2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column to

move and press the “Green” button.

3 Press [3, 4] to select the new position of the channel and press

the “Green” button.

≥Repeat the steps 2 – 3 to move other channels.

4 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

To delete channels on a Favourite

1 Press [1]

2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column and

press the “Yellow” button.

≥Repeat this step to delete other channels. ≥Press the “Blue” button to delete all the channels from the

Favourite.

3 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

Deleting a channel from a Favourite does not affect the channel itself. [DVB-C] You can still select the channel from the “All Channels” or other categories (e.g. TV, Radio, etc.) after deleting channels from a Favourite. [DVB-T] You can still select the channel from the “All Channels” after deleting channels from a Favourite.

To change the name of a Favourite in the “Favourite” column

1 Press [1]

2 Press the “Red” button.

(> 50, Entering text)

When the station name of the left column is highlighted

∫ Auto Setup Restart

You can restart auto channel setting if set up (> 8) fails for some reason.

When the confirmation screen appears

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

You can also use the following method to restart Auto Setup. When the unit is on and stopped

Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the Language setting screen appears.

All the settings except for clock settings, remote control code, ratings levels and PINs (“Ratings” in Disc menu and “Child Lock” in Tuning menu), etc. return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.

Add AllAdd

VQT3C69

∫ Settings for DVB-C Channels/

Add New DVB Channels

Progress 0%

100%

No. QualityChannel Name Type

Add New DVB Channels

Scan CH 5 69

CH QualityChannel Name Type

A new DVB Channel has been found. Start DVB Auto Setup ? Selecting DVB Auto Setup will delete all Timer Programmes.

New Channel

NoYes

DVB Advanced Setup

010

Network ID

Signal Quality

010

Signal Strength

Home Frequency

MHz

338,00

Settings for DVB-T Channels

Press [OK] to show the following settings.

[DVB-C] DVB Manual Tuning

You can set channels manually that the DVB Auto Setup could not complete successfully.

DVB Manual Tuning

Frequency

Symbol Rate Bandwidth Signal Quality Signal Strength

No.

Free TV : 0 Pay TV : 0 Radio : 0

SCAN

START Frequency RETURN

SELECT

1 Press [2, 1] to adjust the frequency.

≥Adjust the frequency by checking the signal strength and signal

quality displays. [Refer to “Signal Condition” (> right) for signal quality and signal strength.]

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Symbol Rate” and enter Symbol Rate for

tuning with the numbered buttons if needed. ≥Normally set to “Auto”. (Default : “Auto”)

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Bandwidth” and press [2, 1] to select

“7 MHz” or “8 MHz”.

4 Press [OK] to start scan.

The set channel is displayed in the table.

5 Press [EXIT] and press [WXCH] to check that applicable

channels have been selected.

[DVB-T] DVB Manual Tuning

You can set channels manually that the DVB Auto Setup could not complete successfully.

Channel System

Frequency

Signal Quality Signal Strength

No.

TV : 0 Radio : 0 Data : 0

START SCAN OFFSET RETURN

1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel you want to set. 2 Press [2, 1] to adjust the frequency.

≥Adjust the frequency by checking the signal strength and signal

quality displays. [Refer to “Signal Condition” (> right) for signal quality and signal strength.]

3 Press [OK] to start scan.

The set channel is displayed in the table.

4 Press [EXIT] and press [WXCH] to check that applicable

channels have been selected.

Add New DVB Channels

You can search for newly added digital channels to receive.

[DVB-C] [DVB-T]

338,00 Auto 8

010 010

DVB Manual Tuning

Western Europe (CCIR)

[CH24] 010 010

MHz

NewChannel Name Type

0 9

Number

498,0

MHz

NewChannel Name Type

Change Channel System

If there is no signal quality and/ or signal strength, press the “Red” button and select the correct channel system.

[Automatic] When a new DVB channel is added, New Channel

Message appears automatically. If you select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.).

[Off] New Channel Message does not appear.

Signal Condition

You can check the Signal Condition.

[DVB-C] [DVB-T]

DVB Signal Condition

DVB Channel

Signal Quality 010 Signal Strength 010 Network Name Parameter

RETURN

1 Das Erste

Kabel Deutschland 113 MHz, 6900kS/s

Channel Channel

DVB Signal Condition

DVB Channel

Signal Quality 010

Signal Quality 010 Signal Strength 010

Signal Strength 010

RETURN

+ –

[CH14] 5 BR3

Channel

Channel Channel

Channel

+ –

–

Press [WXCH] to select the channel. When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be

selected:

1 Press [EXIT] to exit the screen. 2 Press [WXCH] to select a digital channel. “D” appears on the

unit’s display.

3 Display the Setup menu again (> 64).

Signal Quality

The quality of the signal is shown. Below 2 (display red): The signal quality is so poor that there may be interference in the pictures and sound. 2–5 (display orange): The signal quality is basically adequate, but brief interference in the pictures and sound is possible in isolated case. Over 5 (display green): Optimum picture and sound quality.

Signal Strength

The strength of the signal is shown. The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength 0%, “10” means signal strength 100%. If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red. Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial. ≥When the signal is weak:

– adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the

Setup menu (> left).

– check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly

broadcasting.

[DVB-C] Network Name

The network name which is stored in the transport stream list for the current DVB service is displayed. If there is no network name in it, “Unknown” is displayed.

[DVB-C] Parameter

The frequency and the symbol rate are displayed.

[DVB-C] DVB Advanced Setup

You can set up channels by entering “Home Frequency” and “Network ID” obtained from your cable provider. ≥Digital timer recording programmes are cancelled and digital

tuning data are replaced by new ones.

[DVB-C] Press [3, 4] to select “Quick Scan” or “Full Scan” and press [OK].

The unit starts searching for newly available digital channels. This takes about 20 minutes.

A message is displayed when the search is finished. “No new DVB channels found.” is displayed when no new channels can be found.

Press [OK] to save the newly found channels.

New Channel Message

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Home Frequency” and press [2, 1] to

select the predefined value. ≥You can also enter the frequency with numbered buttons.

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Network ID” and enter Network ID with

numbered buttons.

4 Press [OPTION] to add “Symbol Rate”, if needed.

≥If you do not need to add “Symbol Rate”, go to step 6.

5 Press [3, 4] to select “---- ksym/s (User Def.)” and enter the

symbol rate with numbered buttons and then press [OK].

6 Press [OK].

Advanced Setup starts.

Setting menus

VQT3C69

Changing the unit’s settings

Pos Channel CH Fine Tuning Video System

901

Auto

Manual Tuning

ARD

Auto

Mono

Off

Title Page

301

RETURN

SELECT

DVB Preferred Language

You can select up to 2 different subtitles and audio tracks to be used when audio and subtitles of digital broadcasts are received. Select the order of priority. If the selected language is not available, then the language included in the broadcast programme is selected.

Multi Audio Multi Audio ( alternative )

[English] [German] [Italian] [French] [Spanish] [Turkish] [Czech] [Slovak] [Hungarian] [Polish] [Russian]

[Original]

Subtitles Subtitles ( alternative )

[English] [German] [Italian] [French] [Spanish] [Turkish] [Czech] [Slovak] [Hungarian] [Polish] [Russian]

The language specified as “Original” by the broadcast channel

[Original]

[DVB-C] Hard of Hearing

[On] If this service is available for the broadcasts, subtitles for

[Off]

the hard of hearing are first priority.

Child Lock

You can restrict viewing and recording of the programmes unsuitable for children. 1 Press [3, 4] to select “Child Lock” and press [OK].

Child Lock

Enter a 4-digit PIN,

then press OK.

∫ Settings for Analogue Channels

Press [OK] to show the following setting.

Manual Tuning

You can delete analogue channels and set the analogue channel details.

Manual Tuning

Pos Channel CH Pos Channel CH

1 ARD 4 2 ZDF 3 N3 4 HR3 5 BR3 10 6

SELECT

7 8

RETURN

Delete

To delete a programme position

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the “Red” button.

Note

≥This unit does not support SECAM L, L’.

To change the tuning settings for individual programme position

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press

[OK].

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

VQT3C69

Number

0 - - 9

RETURN



2 Press the numbered buttons to enter a 4-digit PIN and press

[OK]. ≥A confirmation message is displayed when a four-digit PIN is

entered for the first time. Press [OK].

≥Make a note of the 4-digit PIN in case you forget it. ≥To change the defined 4-digit PIN (> below)

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Parental Rating” and press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select the age and press [OK].

To unlock

After performing steps 1–3 Press [3, 4] to select “No Limit” and press [OK].

Note

≥If you make timer recordings of programmes on which “Child Lock”

works, PIN code entry is required when playing back the recordings.

≥Parental control information of the recorded programmes is not

copied to discs.

To change the defined 4-digit PIN

You can change the defined four-digit PIN. After performing steps 1–2

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Change PIN” and press [OK]. 4 Press the numbered buttons to enter a new 4-digit PIN and press

[OK]. ≥A confirmation message is displayed. Press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].

Pos

Programme position in the table

(You cannot change the programme position.)

Channel

To enter or change the Channel of a TV station

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name and press [OK]. If the station name needs a blank space, select the blank between “Z” and “¢”.

To enter newly available TV stations or change the CH number of an already tuned TV station

Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to enter the CH number of the desired TV station. Wait a few moments until the desired TV station has been tuned. After the desired TV station is tuned, press [OK].

Fine Tuning

To obtain the best tuning condition

Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning condition and press [OK]. ≥Press [1] to return to “Auto”.

Video System

To select the video system type

Press [3, 4] to select “PAL” or “SECAM” if the picture lacks colour, and press [OK]. ≥Auto

This unit automatically distinguishes PAL and SECAM signals.

≥PA L

For receiving PAL signals.

≥SECAM

For receiving SECAM signals.

Mono

To select the type of sound to be recorded

Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo sound is distorted due to inferior reception conditions, or if you want to record the normal (mono) sound during a stereo or bilingual broadcast, and press [OK].

Title Page

To enter the Teletext title page for a channel

Entering title page number allows the unit to automatically record programme and station names. Press [3, 4] or numbered buttons to enter the number and press [OK]. ≥To find the correct title page for the station, refer to its Teletext

TV guide.

You can make the following two settings by selecting the external input channel (AV1, AV2) in step 1. ≥Video System (Auto/PAL/SECAM)

In order to record properly, make the appropriate settings to match the connected equipment.

≥Title Page (Auto/Off)

Disc

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Settings for Playback

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Ratings

Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the numbered buttons when the PIN screen is shown.

Do not forget your PIN.

Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected) [8 No Limit [1 to 7] Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding

[0 Lock All] Prohibits play of all DVD-Video. ≥Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected) [Unlock Recorder] [Change PIN] [Change Level] [Temporary Unlock]

Soundtrack

[English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish] [Russian] [Polish] [Czech] [Original] The original language of each disc will be

[Other ¢¢¢¢]

Subtitles

[Automatic] If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not

[English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish] [Russian] [Polish] [Czech] [Other ¢¢¢¢]

Menus

[English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish] [Russian] [Polish] [Czech] [Other ¢¢¢¢]

[Other ¢¢¢¢]

Enter a code (> 76) with the numbered buttons. When the selected language is not available on the disc, the default language is played. There are discs where you can only switch the language from the menu screen (> 18).

[DVD-V]

Choose the language for audio, subtitle and disc menus.

Some discs start in a certain language despite any changes you make here.

≥

Settings for Recording

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Recording time in EP mode

Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode (> 23, Recording modes and approximate recording/copying times).

[EP ( 6 hours )] [EP ( 8 hours )] ≥The sound quality is better when using “EP ( 6 hours )” than

when using “EP ( 8 hours )”.

Aspect for Recording

Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying. [Automatic] The programme will be recorded in the original

[16:9] [4:3

When recording or copying to the HDD or DVD-RAM with “Rec for High Speed

≥

Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be recorded in the original aspect ratio.

≥In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,

recordings will be made or copied in 4:3. – [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or

– When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW. High-speed copy does not work for the titles recorded in 16:9 even if they were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”

] All DVD-Video can be played.

ratings recorded on them.

selected.

available, subtitles of that language will automatically appear if available on that disc.

You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB disc. You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB disc.

aspect used when recording started (including when recording started at a commercial, etc.).

]

“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

Chapter Creation

Set the automatic Chapter Creation method. (> 42)

[Automatic

[Off] No chapter start points are set.

] [5 minutes]

Rec for High Speed Copy

You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using high speed mode. However, aspect, etc. is restricted ( We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme. This setting is effective when recording from a television programme or external equipment, or when copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.

] You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press

[On

[Off]

[2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. ≥The following restrictions are applied to recorded

titles. – Recordings are made using the aspect ratio set

in “Aspect for Recording” (> left).

– Select the type of audio in advance from

“Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 68).

– You are no longer able to switch the audio when

watching a programme on an input channel on the TV connected to this unit (e.g., AV1, etc).

below).

DVD Speed for High Speed Copy

Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW 4X discs).

[Maximum] [Normal ( Silent )] The noise generated by this unit is less

than when “Maximum” is selected, however the time required for copying will double (approximately).

Start Recording Time

This function sets the timer recording to start earlier than the TV Guide time. [1 min earlier] [3 min earlier] [5 min earlier] [10 min earlier] [Off

]

Finish Recording Time

This function sets the timer recording to stop later than the TV Guide time. [1 min later] [3 min later] [5 min later] [10 min later] [Off

]

Picture

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Comb Filter

Select the picture sharpness when recording. The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC” (>69).

[On] Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this setting. [Off] Select it when recording noisy pictures.

Still Mode

Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (>85, Frames and fields). [Automatic] [Field] Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is

[Frame] Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen

Seamless Play

Select the play mode between Playlist chapter segments and partially deleted titles.

]

The chapters in Playlists (Video) are played seamlessly. This

[On

does not work when there are several audio types included on the Playlists (Video) and when using Quick View (PLAY Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may change slightly.

[Off] The points where chapters in

played accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.

selected. (The picture is coarser.)

clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture is clearer and finer.)

1.3).

Playlists (Video)

change are

Setting menus

VQT3C69

Changing the unit’s settings

Sound

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Dynamic Range Compression

[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only) Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.

[On] [Off

Bilingual Audio Selection

(Analogue broadcast only) Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when: ≥Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-

Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW.

≥“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. ≥Recording or copying sound in LPCM (> right, “Audio Mode for

XP Recording”).

][M2]

[M 1 ≥You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an

external source, such as when copying from a video cassette recorder. Select the audio on the other equipment.

Digital Audio Output

Change the settings when you have connected equipment through this unit’s Digital Audio Output terminal (> 73). ≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

PCM Down Conversion

Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz. ≥Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the settings below if

the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz, or the disc has copy protection.

[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the

connected equipment cannot process signals with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)

] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the

[Off

connected equipment can process signals with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)

Dolby Digital

Select how to output the signal. Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal. Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2 channels. ≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.

[Bitstream

[PCM] When connected to equipment without a built-in

DTS

[Bitstream

[PCM] When connected to equipment without a built-in

MPEG

[Bitstream] When connected to equipment with a built-in

[PCM] When connected to equipment without a built-in

Refer to the operating instructions for connected devices to verify whether or not they can decode each of the audio formats.

] When connected to equipment with a built-in Dolby

Digital decoder.

Dolby Digital decoder.

] When connected to equipment with a built-in DTS

decoder.

DTS decoder.

MPEG decoder.

]

Audio Mode for XP Recording

Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode. [Dolby Digital ≥The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of

normal XP mode recordings.

≥The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected

LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.

≥When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in

advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> left).

] (> 85) [LPCM] (> 85)

Display

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Language

Choose the language for these menus and on-screen messages. [English] [Deutsch [Español] [Polski] [Русский]

On-Screen Messages

Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information screen (> 17) disappears automatically. The length of time the control panel (> 40) is displayed can also be changed, but “Off” does not work.

[Off] (The digital channel information is not displayed.) [3 sec.] [5 sec.]

Grey Background

Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey background when tuner reception is weak.

] [Off]

[On

Unit’s Display

Changes the brightness of the unit’s display. This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save in Standby” to “On” or “On Timer” (> 70).

[Bright

] [Dim]

[Automatic] The display turns dark during play and disappears

when the unit is turned off. When “Power Save in Standby” is activated (> 70), power consumption while in standby mode is reduced.

Pause Live TV Icon

Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the on-screen icon while using the Pause Live TV function.

] [Off]

[On

Screen Saver

[On] When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes

while the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is displayed. To return to the previous screen, press [OK].

[Off]

Teletext Character Set

Select Teletext language.

] English, French, German, Greek, Italian, Spanish,

[West

[East 1] Czech, English, Estonian, Lettish, Rumanian,

[East 2] Czech, Hungarian, Lettish, Polish, Rumanian,

Swedish, Turkish, etc.

Russian, Ukrainian, etc.

Slovak, etc.

FUNCTION MENU Display

[On] When the unit is turned on, the FUNCTION MENU will be

displayed. (> 5)

[Off]

] [Français] [Italiano]

[7 sec.] [10 sec.]

VQT3C69

Connection

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.) Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may not be able to change the settings.

TV Aspect

Set to match the type of television connected. [16:9

] When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.

[Pan & Scan]

[Letterbox]

TV System

Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting with, or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles on the HDD.

[PAL

] ≥Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system

[NTSC] ≥Select when connecting to a NTSC television.

Note

≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)

≥If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be

used.

≥During recording, timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby,

this unit cannot play discs that do not match the “TV System” (PAL/NTSC) setting. Set “TV System” to match the discs before playing them.

To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)

While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.

When connected to a 4:3 aspect television, side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture.

When connected to a 4:3 aspect television. 16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style.

television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as PAL 60.

≥Select to record television programmes and PAL input

from other equipment.

≥[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on

the HDD.

Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.

≥Select to record NTSC input from other equipment. ≥[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded

on the HDD.

HDMI Settings

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

HDMI Video Format

You can only select items compatible with the connected equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed. However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it may be improved by changing the setting. ≥To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need

to connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this unit is connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it must

also be 1080p compatible. [576i / 480i] [576p / 480p] [720p] [1080i] [1080p] When setting video output to “1080p”, we

[Automatic

recommend using High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and are less than 5 meters to prevent video distortion etc.

] Automatically selects the output resolution best

suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p / 480p or 576i / 480i).

Aspect for 4:3 Video

To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television.

[4:3

]

Picture output expands left or right.

[16:9]

Picture is output as original aspect with side panels.

Digital Audio Output

[HDMI and Optical] [Optical Only]

Select when this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital audio cable and connected to a TV with an HDMI cable and you want to enjoy the highest quality of audio from discs (

73).

VIERA Link

Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.

[On

]

[Off] Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.

AV1 Output

Set according to the terminal of the connected TV. If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select “RGB 1” or “RGB 2”.

]

[Video

Select when a TV that can receive a composite signal is connected.

[S Video]

Select when a TV that can receive an S Video signal is connected.

[RGB 1]

Select when a TV that can receive an RGB signal is connected. If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.

[RGB 2]

Select when a TV that can receive an RGB signal is connected. If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.

Setting menus

VQT3C69

Changing the unit’s settings

Setup

Tuning

Remote Control

Press “” and “OK” together for more than 5 seconds on the remote control.

Disc

e.g., This screen appears while receiving a digital broadcast.

AV2 Settings

Set to match the connected equipment. ≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

AV2 Input

Set to “S Video” when receiving or recording S Video output from external equipment.

] [S Video]

[Video

Ext Link

This setting cannot be made when the “TV System” is set to “NTSC” (> 69).

[Ext Link 1] When a digital satellite receiver which transmits a

special control signal recordings via the 21-pin Scart cable is connected. Start and stop timings of recording are controlled by the control signal.

[Ext Link 2

] When external equipment with a timer function is

connected. When it turns on, recording starts. When it turns off, recording stops.

Active Antenna

[On] Select this when you will use indoor antenna that is not

equipped with power supply.

]

[Off

Common Interface

Access to software contained on Common Interface (CI) modules. (> 6, 10) Follow the on-screen instructions.

Can be selected when selecting Digital Terrestrial (DVB-T) Channels in Auto Setup

Others

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Remote Control

Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products close together.

] [DVD 2] [DVD 3]

[DVD 1 Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.

Press [3,4] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” or “DVD 3”) and press [OK].

To change the code on the remote control 2 While pressing [OK], press and hold the numbered button

([1], [2] or [3]) for more than 5 seconds.

3 Press [OK].

∫ When the following indicator appears on the

unit’s display

The unit’s remote control code

Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s (> step 2).

Clock

This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital

broadcasts and automatically corrects the time several times a

day. However, if the time is not set correctly, use the settings listed

in the method below.

Press [

3, 4]

to select “Off” of “Automatic” and press [OK].

Clock

Automatic

Time Date

0 : 00 : 00

Number

0 9

Please set clock manually.

CHANGE

SELECT

OK: store RETURN: leave

RETURN

. 1

Off

2010

2 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.

The items change as follows: Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year ^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J

3 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.

You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.

4 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.

The clock starts.

Note

If a TV station transmits a time setting signal, and when

“Automatic” in the Clock setting menu is set to “On”, the automatic

time correction function checks the time and if necessary it is

adjusted several times every day.

Standby Settings

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Power Save in Standby

[On] It will go into “Power Save in Standby” mode

[Off] It is possible to start quickly from the standby

[On Timer] “Power Save in Standby” is set to activate

1 Press [3, 4] to select “On Timer” and press [OK].

Power Save in Standby

Number

0 9

CHANGE

SELECT

RETURN

2 Press [3, 4] to set the start time (hour). 3 Press [2, 1] to select the stop time and press [3, 4] to

set the stop time (hour).

4 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.

≥You can also use the numbered buttons for setting. ≥You can set start and stop time by the hour. ≥If the clock has not been set, “Power Save in Standby” is

activated at all hours.

when the unit is in standby mode.

mode. (Quick Start mode)

during the setting time period. (> below)

Power Save On Timer

From

Saves standby power consumption by disabling Quick Start function and AV2 loop-through in standby. Unit's Display is set to "Automatic". Press OK to manually set the period of Power Save.

:00

Note

Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1 (> step 2).

VQT3C69

Auto Standby

Set the time to automatically turn the unit off. After the unit has finished operating, the unit will be turned off once the set time has passed.

[30 minutes] [1 hour] [2 hours] [4 hours

[6 hours]

[Off] The unit will not automatically turn off.

]

Auto Standby after OTR

[On] This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not

operated for approximately 5 minutes after completing One Touch Recording (> 19).

[Off]

Auto Standby after Copy

[On] This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not

operated for approximately 5 minutes after completing copy (> 51-59).

]

[Off

RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )

[On] Broadcast signals are output from this unit.

TV can receive broadcast signals even if this unit is in standby mode when connecting TV with this unit using the RF cable (> 73).

[Off] Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” when the confirmation

message is displayed. Broadcast signals are not output from this unit to reduce standby power consumption. ≥Power consumption is lowered additionally when

“Power Save in Standby” is activated.

≥If this unit turns into standby mode when connecting TV

with this unit using the RF cable, proper broadcast images do not appear on TV.

DivX Registration

You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Videoon-Demand (VOD) content (> 36).

TV Guide Type

This unit can receive either of the TV Guides for the digital or analogue broadcasts. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

≥It will go into Standby status once, and the power will be turned

on again automatically. This procedure may take a few minutes.

≥All of the TV Guide data for digital broadcasts and timer

recording settings will be erased.

[Digital Channels

] [Analogue Channels]

System Update

In order to update this unit’s software, the TV Guide download, and to support system changes made by broadcasts, this unit periodically performs software updates. Press [OK] to show the following settings.

≥Only the TV Guide for digital broadcast can be downloaded with

this setting. Refer to page 9 for analogue broadcasts.

≥Update data and TV Guide download information are sent by an

unscheduled digital broadcast. In order to receive these updates, you must be able to receive digital broadcasts.

≥An update will take approximately 60 minutes. While the update

is in progress, “SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display. You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete. Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress may damage the unit.

≥TV Guide download will take approximately 60 minutes. While

the TV Guide download is in progress, “GUIDE” appears on the unit’s display. The TV Guide download can be interrupted by switching on the unit.

TV Guide/Software search period Software Search Period

Selects the time to automatically perform TV Guide download and updates when the unit is set to standby mode. This can only be set when “TV Guide Download in Standby” or “Software Update in Standby” is set to “On”. ≥If there is a programmed recording set for the time you have

selected, the programmed recording will be given priority. In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is not available: [Automatic [02:00–06:00] [06:00–10:00] [10:00–14:00] [14:00–18:00] [18:00–22:00] [22:00–02:00] In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is available: [Automatic

]

[Daytime] (06:00-22:00)

]

The unit will give priority to searching for TV Guide download and update data at midnight.

§2

§1

Software Update Search Now

Start the search for new software manually. A new software version is announced by a message. Do not turn your unit off during the update. This could result in the loss of data. A message shows that the update has finished. ≥If applicable update data is found, press [2, 1] to select “Yes”

and press [OK].

[DVB-T] GUIDE Plus+ Data Download Now

Start downloading GUIDE Plus+ data. ≥If this is performed in standby mode for timer recording, timer

recording may not work correctly.

[DVB-T] GUIDE Plus+ System Information

You can check the condition of GUIDE Plus+ system of this unit.

[DVB-T] Post Code

You can input the postal code which is necessary to download area specific information of GUIDE Plus+ system.

§1

When “Digital Channels” is selected in “TV Guide Type”

§2

When “Analogue Channels” is selected in “TV Guide Type”

Initialize

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Shipping Condition

All the settings except for the language settings, Slideshow Settings, clock settings, ratings levels and PINs (“Ratings” in Disc menu and “Child Lock” in Tuning menu), etc. return to the factory preset.

[Yes] [No

Default Settings

All the settings except for the tuning settings, clock settings, language settings, disc language settings, remote control code, ratings levels and PINs (“Ratings” in Disc menu and “Child Lock” in Tuning menu), etc. return to the factory presets.

[Yes] [No

§1

The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.

§2

Recording on the HDD will not be deleted.

§1, §2

]

§1, §2

]

Setting menus

TV Guide Download in Standby

[On] When you set this unit to standby mode, TV Guide data is

downloaded automatically.

[Off] ≥In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is available, the setting

is fixed to “On” automatically.

Software Update in Standby

[On] When you set this unit to standby mode, software

updates are downloaded automatically.

[Off]

VQT3C69

Other Settings

Turn TV on/off

Input select

Volu me

Channel Select

Television operation

You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the television channel and change the television volume.

1 Point the remote control at the

2 Test by turning on the television and

Note

≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the

one that allows correct operation.

Manufacturer and Code No.

Panasonic 01/02/03/04 METZ 05/28 AIWA 35 MITSUBISHI 05/19/20/47 AKAI 27/30 MIVAR 24 BEJING 33 NEC 36 BEKO 05/71/72/73/74 NOBLEX 33 BENQ 58/59 NOKIA 25/26/27/60/61 BP 09 NORDMENDE BRANDT 10/15 OLEVIA 45 BUSH CENTREX 66 ORION 05 CHANGHONG 69 PEONY 49/69 CURTIS 05 PHILCO 41/48/64 DAEWOO 64/65 DESMET 05 PHONOLA 05 DUAL 05 PIONEER 37/38 ELEMIS 05 PROVIEW 52 FERGUSON 10/34 FINLUX 61 RADIOLA 05 FISHER 21 SABA 10 FUJITSU 53 SALORA 26 FUNAI 32/42/43/65/6863/67 GOLDSTAR 05/50/51 SANSUI 05 GOODMANS GRADIENTE 36 SCHNEIDER 05/29/30 GRUNDIG HIKONA 52 SELECO 05/25 HITACHI INNO HIT 05 SIEMENS 09 IRRADIO ITT 25 SONY 08 JINGXING JVC 17/30/39/70 TELEFUNKEN 10/11/12/13/14 KDS KOLIN 45 TEX ONDA 52 KONKA LG 05/50/51 TOSHIBA 16/57

VQT3C69

MAG 52 YAMAHA 18/41

VOL

DRIVE

SELECT

2 54

PAGE

television While pressing [Í TV], enter the code with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 01: [0] > [1] 10: [1] > [0]

changing channels.

≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows

correct operation.

≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for

your television does not allow control of your television, this remote control is not compatible with your television.

Brand Code Brand Code

09 SEG

05/22/23/40/41

30 SINUDYNE 05

52 TEVION

62 THOMSON

07/46

ONWA 30/39/70

PHILIPS

PYE

SAMSUNG

SANYO 21/54/55/56

SHARP 18

TCL

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

05/06/46

05/69/75/76/77/78

31/33/66/67/6949

10/15/44

05LOEWE

HOLD function

The HOLD function deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] simultaneously until “X HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.

If you press a button while the HOLD function is on, “X HOLD” appears on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.

To cancel the HOLD function

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] simultaneously until “X HOLD” disappears.

CI Plus compatible CAM (Conditional Access Module) software upgrade

Software of CAM (compatible CI Plus) can be upgraded automatically from broadcasts. Availability of software upgrade is detected while viewing the programmes compatible with CI Plus.

When notification is displayed on the screen, select “Yes” and press [OK].

≥Notice is not displayed in the following cases:

– When recording a programme – When timer recording and CAM software upgrade occur

simultaneously

– When displaying FUNCTION MENU, DIRECT NAVIGATOR, etc.

≥“CAM-UP” is displayed on the unit’s display during upgrading.

It is also displayed on the Digital Channel Information (> 17) when the CAM software can be upgraded immediately.

1 Das Erste

ZDF-Mor

19:00 - 19:30

To execute CAM software upgrade, push the “Red” button while the digital channel information is displayed, and follow the instructions on the screen.

Note

≥Operations such as view, playback, or record cannot be performed

while upgrading the CAM. Any buttons on the remote control or the unit cannot be used while upgrading the CAM.

≥If the timer recording is started, CAM software upgrade is

cancelled to start recording.

≥For details, refer to your CAM’s operating instructions or consult

your dealer.

NOW

TXT

All Channels

18:53

Change Category

CAM Upgrade Info

Additional connections

Reference

RF IN

RF OUT

AUDIO

VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO IN

R L

VIDEO

This unit’s rear panel

Audio/Video cable

Television’s rear panel

RF IN

RF OUT

AUDIO

VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO IN

R L

Audio cable

This unit’s rear panel

Amplifier’s rear panel

AV OUT

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(

BITSTREAM

)

Optical digital audio cable

Do not bend sharply when connecting.

This unit’s rear panel

Insert fully, with this side facing up.

Amplifier’s rear panel

OUT

AV OUT

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(

BITSTREAM

)

COMMON INTERFACE

To the terrestrial aerial

RF coaxial cable

This unit’s rear panel

To household mains socket

(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

AC mains lead

(supplied) Connect only after all other connections are complete.

21-pin Scart cable

RF coaxial cable

(supplied)

Cooling fan

Connecting a terminal other than the 21-pin Scart terminal (> 7, above)

Television’s rear panel

VCR’s rear panel

Digital satellite receiver’s rear panel

21-pin Scart cable

Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

Common Interface (CI) slot

Cable

Aerial cable/ CATV Coaxial cable

Connecting a television with AUDIO/ VIDEO

≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.

Connecting a stereo amplifier

≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.

Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal

≥To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an

amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.

Required setting

“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (> 68)

≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital

audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting “Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (> 69). In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the television.

≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not supplied),

check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.

≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.

OPTICAL IN

ON INTERFACE

AV OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

PCPCM/M/BITSTREAM

Connecting a television and VCR, digital satellite receiver

VHF/UHF

RF IN

RF OUT

VHF/UHF

RF IN

VIDEO

AUDIO

OUT

RF OUT

COMMON INTERFACE

AV1 (TV)

AV2 (

)

EXT

AV OUT

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

PCPCM/M/BITSTREAM

OPTICAL

AC IN

Setting menus

Reference

Only when connecting digital satellite receiver with this unit

Required setting

“AV2 Input” setting in the Setup menu (> 70)

Connect the unit directly to the television (> 6)

VQT3C69

Frequently asked questions

Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.

Recording

Set up

Which aerial is suitable for receiving digital terrestrial broadcasts?

¾ You can use your current aerial. Room rod aerials are also

suitable. Use an indoor antenna if the reception is poor. Consult your local TV aerial installer.

Can this unit receive or record High Definition (HD) broadcasts?

¾ Ye s.

However, HD broadcasts are down-converted to SD video when receiving or recording them.

What equipment is necessary to play multi channel surround sound?

¾ You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without

other equipment. You must connect this unit with an HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder. (> 7, 73)

Are the headphones and speakers directly connected to the unit?

¾ You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through

the amplifier etc. (> 73)

Disc

Can I play DVD-Video and Video CDs bought in another country?

¾ You cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not

include “2” or “ALL”. Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information. (> Cover)

Can a DVD-Video that does not have a region number be played?

¾ The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a

standard. You cannot play discs that do not have a region number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to a standard.

Please tell me about disc compatibility with this unit.

¾ This unit records/copies on the following discs (HDD):

– Records TV programme or other contents by pressing

[¥ REC], Timer Recording or Flexible Recording: HDD only

– Records using EXT LINK: HDD/DVD-RAM/DVD-R/DVD-RW

(DVD-Video format)/+R/+RW

– Copies titles: HDD/DVD-RAM/DVD-R/DVD-RW (DVD-Video

format)/DVD-R DL/+R/+RW/+R DL This unit plays the following discs: HDD/DVD-RAM/DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-R DL/+R/+RW/+R DL/ DVD-Video/CD/Video CD/SVCD (> 12–13)

¾ This unit also records and plays high speed recording

compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW discs.

Can I record from a commercially purchased video cassette or DVD?

¾ Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy

protected; therefore, recording is usually not possible.

Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit be played on other equipment?

¾ You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players

after finalising the disc on this unit. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.

¾ If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible

equipment.

Can a digital audio signal from this unit be recorded to other equipment?

¾ You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD,

change the “Digital Audio Output” settings to the following in the Setup menu. (> 68) – PCM Down Conversion: On – Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is permitted and the recording equipment is compatible with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.

¾ You cannot record MP3 signals.

[Analogue] Can I switch to bilingual broadcast during recording?

¾ Yes, you can. Just press [AUDIO] during recording on HDD.

(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”) (> 32)

Can I high speed copy to a disc?

¾ Yes, you can. (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to

“On” before recording the programme.) Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies. (> 51)

USB

What can or cannot be done using the USB port on this unit?

¾ You can play DivX, MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB

memory. (> 35)

¾ You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the

HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 56, 57)

¾ You can copy MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD. (> 58) ¾ You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the

HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 55)

¾ Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB

memory.

¾ Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory

cannot be formatted on this unit.

¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 14)

VQT3C69

Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW compatibility with this unit.

¾ This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded

in one of the following standards: CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD (conforming to IEC62107), DivX, MP3 and still pictures (JPEG). (> 13, 14)

¾ You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.

Music

TV Channels

Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD to the disc or USB memory?

¾ No, you cannot.

TV Guide

Is it possible to programme a recording, with a start and end time that are different from the TV Guide system?

¾ You can manually change the start and end time of

programmes in the Timer Recording menu. (> 26)

¾ If setting timer recording using the TV Guide system, the start

recording time and finish recording time can be set to a margin of up to 10 minutes. (> 67, Start Recording Time, Finish Recording Time)

Can I receive TV Guide system data via a connected digital satellite receiver or a Set Top Box?

¾ No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with

digital satellite receivers or Set Top Boxes, please use the External Link feature or your unit’s manual timer programming. (> 25, 26)

How can I cancel a Timer programming?

¾ Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and then

press [DELETE ¢]. (> 26)

Please tell me about TV reception channels.

¾ Channel coverage depends on the tuner system you use.

Refer to the following list of TV Reception Channels.

List of TV Reception Channels

Tun er

System

PAL-B,G,H CCIR E2 – E12

DVB-T/C Germany 5 – 12 21 – 69 D051 - D073,

Channel

Coverage

VHF UHF CATV

A – H2

(Italy)

21 – 69 S01 – S05

(S1 – S3)

S1 – S20

(M1 – U10)

S21 – S41

D113 - D858,

S1–S20

(M1–U10)

7 MHz Band

51 – 858 MHz

What happens when I unplug the unit from the household mains socket?

¾ The TV Guide data will not be updated. ¾ If the unit is disconnected from the household mains socket for

a longer period of time, the TV Guide data will be lost.

¾ Clock setting will be erased and timer recording will not work.

What happens if my postal code changes, e.g. if I move?

¾ TV Guide data may not be downloaded correctly. Change “Post

Code” in the Setup menu (for [DVB-T]), or change the postal code in the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu (for [Analogue]). If necessary, perform a full Auto-Setup. Saved TV Guide data may be lost. (> 30, 64, 71)

[Analogue] Why is the GUIDE Plus+ system only available after approx. 2 hours?

¾ The data rate, at which GUIDE Plus+ is sent, is limited.

Depending on the country, signal quality and number of channels received, the time until the GUIDE Plus+ system is ready can vary.

[Analogue] How often is the GUIDE Plus+ data updated and when?

¾ The GUIDE Plus+ data is transmitted from the Host Channel

(the television station transmitting the television programme list) several times a day. Data will be transmitted at 2:50 AM every day. It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download. The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded automatically when the unit is turned off. (> 10)

Reference

VQT3C69

Messages

On the television

This unit is not authorised to play this protected DivX video.

Cannot finish recording completely. Copy-protect signal was detected.

Disc is full, or maximum number of titles are recorded. Cannot finish recording completely.

Cannot record. Maximum number of titles exceeded.

Cannot playback. TV system is different from the setting. To playback, please change the TV System in Setup.

Cannot play on this unit. ≥You tried to play a non-compatible image. (> 14)

No Disc ≥The disc may be upside down.

No folders. ≥There is no compatible folder in this unit. (> 14)

Not enough space in the copy destination. ≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items. (> 21, 43, 47, 62)

This is a non-recordable disc. ≥The disc may be dirty or scratched. (> 15)

Unable to format.

This disc is not formatted properly. Format it using DVD Management in FUNCTION MENU.

Not enough space on HDD. Space of 4 hours ( in SP mode ) is necessary.

Maximum number of titles is recorded on HDD. Please delete unwanted titles.

This DivX rental has expired.

$ ≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.

≥You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different

registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX) (> 36)

≥The programme was copy-protected.

≥The HDD or disc may be full. ≥The maximum number of programme has been exceeded. (> 23) ≥[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.

[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.] (> 21, 43, 62)

≥Use a new disc.

≥You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV

system currently selected on the unit. Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit. (> 69)

≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination

Capacity:” is not exceeded. (> 54, 57, 59)

≥The unit cannot record/copy on the disc you inserted. Insert a compatible disc for this

unit. (> 12)

≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW. (> 62)

≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD

or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are greater than 499. Delete unwanted titles from the HDD. (> 21, 43, 62)

≥The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX) (> 36)

Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.

Abkhazian: 6566 Afar: 6565 Afrikaans: 6570 Albanian: 8381 Amharic: 6577 Arabic: 6582 Armenian: 7289 Assamese: 6583 Aymara: 6589 Azerbaijani: 6590 Bashkir: 6665 Basque: 6985 Bengali; Bangla:

Bhutani: 6890 Bihari: 6672 Breton: 6682 Bulgarian: 6671 Burmese: 7789 Byelorussian: 6669 Cambodian: 7577

Catalan: 6765 Chinese: 9072 Corsican: 6779 Croatian: 7282 Czech: 6783 Danish: 6865 Dutch: 7876 English: 6978 Esperanto: 6979 Estonian: 6984 Faroese: 7079 Fiji: 7074 Finnish: 7073

6678

French: 7082 Frisian: 7089 Galician: 7176 Georgian: 7565 German: 6869 Greek: 6976 Greenlandic: 7576 Guarani: 7178

Gujarati: 7185 Hausa: 7265 Hebrew: 7387 Hindi: 7273 Hungarian: 7285 Icelandic: 7383 Indonesian: 7378 Interlingua: 7365 Irish: 7165 Italian: 7384 Japanese: 7465 Javanese: 7487 Kannada: 7578 Kashmiri: 7583 Kazakh: 7575 Kirghiz: 7589 Korean: 7579 Kurdish: 7585 Laotian: 7679 Latin: 7665 Latvian, Lettish: 7686

Lingala: 7678 Lithuanian: 7684 Macedonian: 7775 Malagasy: 7771 Malay: 7783 Malayalam: 7776 Maltese: 7784 Maori: 7773 Marathi: 7782 Moldavian: 7779 Mongolian: 7778 Nauru: 7865 Nepali: 7869 Norwegian: 7879 Oriya: 7982 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Persian: 7065 Polish: 8076 Portuguese: 8084 Punjabi: 8065 Quechua: 8185

Rhaeto-Romance:

8277 Romanian: 8279 Russian: 8285 Samoan: 8377 Sanskrit: 8365 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Serbian: 8382 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Shona: 8378 Sindhi: 8368 Singhalese: 8373 Slovak: 8375 Slovenian: 8376 Somali: 8379 Spanish: 6983 Sundanese: 8385 Swahili: 8387 Swedish: 8386 Tagalog: 8476 Tajik: 8471

Tamil: 8465 Tatar: 8484 Telugu: 8469 Thai: 8472 Tibetan: 6679 Tigrinya: 8473 Tonga: 8479 Turkish: 8482 Turkmen: 8475 Twi: 8487 Ukrainian: 8575 Urdu: 8582 Uzbek: 8590

Vietnamese: 8673 Volapük: 8679

Welsh: 6789 Wolof: 8779 Xhosa: 8872 Yiddish: 7473 Yoruba: 8979 Zulu: 9085

VQT3C69

On the unit’s display

The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.

DVD 

(“∑” stands for a number.)

≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.

Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more than 5 seconds. (> 70)

GUIDE ≥TV Guide data is being downloaded. (> 10, 71)

HARD ERR

≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

NoERAS ≥You cannot delete items on this disc.

The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

NoREAD ≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit. (> 15)

≥This message may appear when the DVD lens cleaner has finished cleaning.

Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc. (> 11)

NoWRIT ≥You cannot write to this disc.

The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

PLEASE WAIT

≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying out its

recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait until the message disappears.

PROG FULL

≥There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes. (> 26)

REMOVE ≥The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device and turn the unit off.

SP 35:50 LP 151h

“SP”, “LP” and the numbers are examples.

≥Available space on the HDD or disc.

The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP 151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available. “SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151 hours”.

SW-DL ≥The unit is performing a software update. (> 71)

CAM-UP ≥CAM is being upgraded. (> 72)

UNFORMAT

≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)

that has been recorded on other equipment. Format the disc to use it. However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted. (> 62)

UNSUPPORT

≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on. (> 12–13) ≥You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory. (> 14)

F74 ≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.

Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

F75 ≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.

Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

U50 ≥A short circuit was detected in the aerial input. Please check your aerial.

U59 ≥The unit is hot.

The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears. Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.

U61 ≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred. This is displayed when the unit is in the

recovery process to return to normal operation. Once the display clears you can use the unit again. If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

U76 ≥HDMI cannot be output because this unit is connected to a model that does not support copyright protection.

U80 U81

≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode.

Now press [Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.

U99

U88 ≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while recording,

playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation. Once the display clears you can use the unit again. (> 78) If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

H or F ≥ There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s condition.)

≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the following.

(> 78–83)

1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.

2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.) If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the dealer. Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service.

X HOLD ≥The HOLD function is activated.

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears. (> 72)

The message are alternately displayed.

Reference

VQT3C69

Troubleshooting guide

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.

The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:

≥Regular disc rotating sounds. ≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions. ≥Image disturbance during search.

Interruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting breaks.

≥ ≥Operations are slow to respond when “Power Save in Standby” is

activated.

≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again

using a Panasonic disc.)

≥The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being activated.

(Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 3 seconds.)

≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected

sound.

Power

No power. The unit does not turn on pressing [Í].

¾ Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active

household mains socket. (> 6, 73)

¾ Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording

standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display blinks when [Í] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby. (> 25)

The unit switches to standby mode.

¾ One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the

main unit to turn the unit on.

¾ The displayed recording/play time is converted from the

number of frames at 29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds) to 1 second. There will be a slight difference between the time displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual 1 hour elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.

“U88” is displayed and the disc cannot be ejected.

¾ The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following

to eject the disc. 1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.

If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 3 seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.

While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CHW] on the main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.

TV screen and video

Television reception worsens or becomes impossible after connecting the unit.

¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided between

the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.

¾ Broadcast signals may not be output from this unit’s RF OUT

terminal. Select “On” in “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” in the Setup menu. (> 71)

VQT3C69

The power is turned off automatically.

¾ If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV

with an HDMI cable, or connected this unit to a Q Linkcompatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable, this unit will be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode. (> 39)

This unit turns off when the TV input is switched.

¾ This is a normal phenomenon when using VIERA Link (HDAVI

Control 4 or later). For details please read the operating instructions for the TV.

Displays

The display is dim.

¾ Change “Unit’s Display” in the Setup menu. (> 68)

“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s display.

¾ Set the clock. (> 70)

The time recorded on the disc and the available time shown do not add up. The displayed time of this unit is different from the actual recording time or MP3 recording time.

¾ Times shown may disagree with actual times. ¾ Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or

+RW increases only when the last recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.

¾ Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R

DL, +R or +R DL, there is no increase in disc space.

¾ More disc space than the actual recording time is used after

recording or editing the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200 times or more.

¾ While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.

The clock is not correct.

¾ Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic time

correction function may not work. In this case, “Automatic” is automatically turned to “Off”. If re-setting the Auto Clock Setting does not work, set the time manually. (> 70)

Compared to the actual recorded time, the elapsed time displayed is less. (Only when recording in NTSC)

The digital channel information or control panel does not appear. Status messages do not appear.

¾ Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) in the “On-Screen

Messages” in the Setup menu. (> 68)

¾ The digital channel information will not appear during playback

or recording.

¾ The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV

supporting “HDAVI Control 2” or later. (> 40)

¾ Analogue broadcasts do not support the digital channel

information.

Some functions of DVB-C/DVB-T do not work.

¾ The unit does not necessarily support all DVB-C/DVB-T

functions such as MHP (Multimedia Home Platform) etc. New functions introduced by broadcasters cannot be guaranteed to work.

The grey background does not appear.

¾ Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu. (> 68)

Screen size is wrong.

¾ Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu. (> 69) ¾ If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to

“16:9” in the Setup menu. (> 69)

The recorded title’s screen size is wrong.

¾ Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for

Recording” to “4:3”. (> 67)

¾ 16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the

following cases. – [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR

(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording mode. – If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW. – If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in

the Setup menu.

When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same aspect, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”. (> 67)

By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a chance that the recording will be made using the wrong aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when recording. (

It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating instructions.

67)

Picture does not appear during timer recording.

¾ Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off.

To confirm the timer recording is going to work properly, turn the unit on.

The screen changes automatically.

¾ When “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On”, the

display may turn to the screen saver mode automatically if there is no operation for 5 minutes or more. (> 68) Press [OK] to return to the previous screen.

There is a lot of after-image when playing video.

¾ Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”. (> 60)

There is no apparent change in picture quality when adjusted with the Picture menu in the onscreen menus.

¾ The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.

The images from this unit do not appear on the television. Picture is distorted.

¾ Make sure that the television is connected to the AV1 terminal,

VIDEO OUT terminal or HDMI terminal on this unit. (> 6, 7, 73)

Make sure that the television’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is correct.

¾ The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used

by the disc now playing. While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds. The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa. (> 69)

¾ When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that

matches with this unit’s TV system.

¾ Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are

connected with HDMI cables. Reduce the number of connected devices.

¾ Video images of the copyright-protected DivX contents stored

on USB device can be output only through the HDMI output terminal. (> 36)

The picture is distorted during play, or video will not play correctly.

¾ You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor

reception or unfavourable weather conditions.

¾ The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear

briefly between recorded titles in the following situations: – between titles recorded with different recording modes. – between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios. – between scenes recorded with different resolutions. – between playlist chapters.

Sound

No sound. Low volume. Distorted sound. Cannot hear the desired audio type.

¾ Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings.

Check the input mode on the amplifier if you have connected one. (> 7, 68, 69, 73)

¾ Press [AUDIO] to select the audio. (> 32) ¾ Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX) ¾ Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are

connected with HDMI cables. Reduce the number of connected devices.

¾ The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is

output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.

¾ To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable,

set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” in the Setup menu. (> 69)

¾ Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be

distorted if this unit is connected with an HDMI cable.

¾ When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you can only

record either the main or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast. If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”. (> 67)

Cannot switch audio.

¾ You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.

– When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),

+R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.

– When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP

Recording” is set to “LPCM”. (> 68)

– When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default

setting is “On”). (> 67)

¾ The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable or an

HDMI cable. You cannot switch the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using audio cables. (> 7, 68, 73)

¾ There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of

how the disc was created.

Operation

Cannot operate the television. The remote control doesn’t work.

¾ Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be

operated even if you change the code. (> 72)

¾ The remote control and main unit are using different codes.

Change the code on the remote control. (> 70) Press and hold [OK] and the indicated

number button at the same time for more than 5 seconds.

¾ The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones. (> 2) ¾ You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s

remote control signal sensor during operation. (> 2)

¾ Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission. ¾ Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that

may be subject to sunlight exposure.

¾ It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again

after changing the batteries. (> 70)

¾ It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after

changing the batteries. (> 72)

¾ The HOLD function is activated. (> 72)

The unit is on but cannot be operated.

¾ Playback drive has not been selected properly. (> 18) ¾ Some operations may be prohibited by the disc. ¾ The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to

disappear.

¾ One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.

Reset the unit as follows: 1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.

If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 3 seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby. Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one minute, then reconnect it.

2 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still

cannot be operated, consult the dealer.

Cannot eject disc.

¾ The unit is recording. ¾

Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display blinks when [ Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby. (

¾ The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and

hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer. If the HOLD function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the HOLD function. (> 72)

] is pressed).

25)

Reference

VQT3C69

Troubleshooting guide

Cannot tune channels.

¾ Check the connections. (> 6, 73)

Startup is slow.

¾ Deactivate “Power Save in Standby” in the Setup menu. (> 70) ¾ Startup takes time in the following situations:

– A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted. – The clock is not set. – Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is

connected.

– When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.

Recording, timer recording and copying

Cannot record. Cannot copy.

¾ You cannot record TV programmes or other contents directly to

the disc by pressing [¥ REC], Timer Recording or Flexible Recording. Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs.

(> 22)

¾ You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be

recorded on. Insert a disc the unit can record onto. (> 12)

¾ The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R]

[+R]DL] [+RW] (> 62)

¾ The disc is protected with DVD Management. (> 62) ¾ Some programmes have limitations on the number of times

they can be recorded (CPRM). (> 85)

¾ You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the

number of titles has reached its limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc. (> 21, 43, 62)

¾ Video cannot be recorded onto a DVD-R with still images

recorded on it.

¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy.

Delete unnecessary titles from the HDD and then copy. (> 21, 43, 62) – If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will

copy titles from the HDD to a blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode recording is necessary).

– If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be

copied has exceeded 499.

¾ You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you

can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.

¾ Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-

Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW you may be unable to record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty times.

¾ DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL

and +RW recorded on this unit may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.

¾ This unit cannot copy NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.

¾ Some broadcasts are copyright protected. ¾ If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry

screen may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN and press [OK].

¾ If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while

“Power Save in Standby” is not activated (Quick Start mode), you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.

The timer programme remains even after recording finishes.

¾ The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly.

A part or whole of a recorded title has been lost.

¾ If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the

household mains socket while recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable. You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. We cannot offer any guarantee regarding lost programmes or discs. (> 62)

The programme name and the recorded title do not match.

¾ There was a programme change after timer recording was set

but the recorded title still has the old programme name.

Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc. disc using the high speed mode.

¾ When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to

“On” in the Setup menu. (The default setting is “On”). (> 67)

¾ In the following cases, high speed mode does not work, even if

the titles were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”. – [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in “EP” or “FR (recordings

5 hours or longer)” mode. – [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in 16:9 aspect. – [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode

or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode.

¾ [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD

recorders with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL or +RW discs with high-speed copy.

When copying, it takes a long time even when high speed mode is selected.

¾ Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if

the disc is high speed recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the disc.

¾ It takes longer than normal to copy many titles. ¾ You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours

when using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP ( 8 hours ) mode recording.

An unusually loud sound is coming from the rotating DVD-R, etc.

¾ When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal, however, this is not a problem.

VQT3C69

Cannot record from external equipment.

¾ Check that the connection is correct. (> 55, 73) ¾ Select the input channel “AV2” for the equipment you have

connected.

Timer recording does not work properly.

¾ The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme

times overlap. Correct the programme. (> 26)

¾ The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer

icon “F” in the timer recording list is not on.) (> 26)

¾ Set the clock. (> 70) ¾ The programme information in the TV Guide system may not be

correct. It is recommended to modify the start and end times to allow a margin of a few minutes, or set “Start Recording Time” and “Finish Recording Time” in the Setup menu. (> 26, 67)

Timer recording does not stop even when [∫] is pressed.

¾ When using the linked timer recording with external equipment,

press [EXT LINK]. (“EXT-L” disappears.) (> 25)

Play

Play fails to start even when [1](PLAY) is pressed. Play starts but then stops immediately.

¾ Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up. (> 15) ¾ The disc is dirty. (> 15) ¾ You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.

(> 12–13)

¾ You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the

equipment used for recording.

¾ You may be able to copy a copyright-protected title that was

recorded to DVD-RAM using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to copyright protection.

¾ When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP ( 8 hours )” mode, play

may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP ( 6 hours )” mode. (> 67)

¾ If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you

purchased it. (DivX) (> 36)

¾ Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages

are displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.

¾ If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry

screen may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN and press [OK].

Audio and video momentarily pause.

¾ This occurs between playlist chapters. ¾ This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles

on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high speed mode.

¾ This occurs as scenes change during Quick View. ¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the

unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (> 22)

DVD-Video is not played.

¾ You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change

this setting. (> 67)

¾ Ensure disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number, and is

not defective. (> Cover)

Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be selected.

¾ The languages are not recorded on the disc. ¾ You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the

soundtrack and subtitles on some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes. (> 18)

The resume play function does not work.

¾ Memorized position on the disc is cancelled when

– press [∫] several times. – open the disc tray. – [CD] [VCD] [USB] turn off the unit. – if a recording or timer recording was executed.

The Video CD picture does not display properly.

¾ When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV

System” in the Setup menu. (> 69)

¾ When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture

cannot be displayed correctly during search.

It takes time before play starts.

¾ This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)

Picture stops.

¾ Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 4 GB. (DivX)

Cannot see the beginning of the title played.

¾ (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI

cable) When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the beginning of the title.

¾ The resume play function is activated.

Press [OPTION] while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed and press [3, 4] to select “Play from beginning” and then press [OK].

Edit

Available disc space does not increase even after deleting a title.

¾ Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-

R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL. (> 21)

¾ Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is

deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW. The disc space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.

Cannot edit.

¾ You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available

space. Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space. (> 21, 43,

62)

¾ If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry

screen may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN and press [OK].

No subtitles.

¾ Subtitles are not recorded on the disc. ¾ Turn the subtitles on and select “Text” or the subtitle number.

(> 60)

Angle cannot be changed.

¾ Angles can only be changed during scenes where different

angles are recorded.

You have forgotten your ratings PIN. You want to cancel the ratings level.

¾ The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc

tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on the unit’s display).

Quick View does not work.

¾ This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital. ¾ This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.

Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does not work.

¾ These functions do not work with finalised discs. ¾ Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings

are different from the title recorded on the disc. (> 69)

Cannot format.

¾ The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.

(> 15)

¾ You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in

this unit. (> 12–13)

Cannot create chapters. Cannot mark the start point or the end point during “Partial Delete” operation.

¾ The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when

you turn it off or remove the disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption to the power before this.

¾ These operations are not possible with still pictures. ¾ You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You

cannot set an end point before a start point.

Cannot delete chapters.

¾ When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine

Chapters” to make the chapter longer. (> 43)

Cannot create a Playlist (Video).

¾ You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title

also includes still pictures. Select them individually.

Reference

VQT3C69

Troubleshooting guide

Music

Tracks could not be copied to the HDD.

¾ If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS

restrictions, they will not be copied.

¾ Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA

specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.

¾ Bonus tracks may not be copied.

ID3 tag of a MP3 file is not completely displayed.

¾ Only the track name ([HDD] [USB]) and artist name ([HDD]) can

be displayed with this unit.

Still pictures

Cannot display DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.

¾ This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy or

while the unit is standing by for linked timer recording with external equipment.

Copying, deleting and setting protection takes a long time.

¾ When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take

a few hours.

¾ When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a

long time. Format the disc. (> 62)

Still pictures (JPEG) do not playback normally.

¾ The images that were edited on the PC, such as

PROGRESSIVE JPEG etc., may not playback. (> 14)

USB

The contents of the USB memory cannot be read.

¾ Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert

again. If this does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.

¾ Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly. (> 15) ¾ The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not

compatible with the unit. (The contents on the USB memory may be damaged.) (> 14)

¾ The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file

extensions that are not compatible with this unit. (> 14)

¾ Turn off and then turn on the unit again. ¾ USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a

USB hub may not be recognized by this unit.

¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 14) ¾ If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB

memory may not be recognized by this unit.

TV Guide

The TV Guide System does not receive any data.

¾ This unit can only display either the TV Guide for the digital

broadcasts or for the analogue broadcasts. Default setting is TV Guide for the digital broadcasts. To display the TV Guide for the analogue broadcasts, change “TV Guide Type” in Setup menu. (> 71)

¾ [Analogue] The GUIDE Plus+ system data is updated several

times each day. When the unit is first connected, the GUIDE Plus+ system is not yet ready to receive data. It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download. Depending on when you set up this unit, it may take approximately one day before you can display the television programme list. (> 10, 30)

¾ [DVB-T] [Analogue] In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is

available, check whether correct post code is entered. (> 30,

71)

¾ Check whether TV Guide system setup was performed in full. ¾ Check whether the clock is properly set. (> 70) ¾ If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the

TV Guide system may not be able to receive any data.

“No Data” is displayed for some or all stations.

¾ [Analogue] These stations may not have been able to be

identified automatically. For these stations, select the “On” in the sub menu under “Editor” and assign the correct reference station manually. (> 30)

¾ Some stations are not supported by the TV Guide system. ¾ Programme the Timer recording manually or via S

(> 26, 29)

The TV Guide information is not displayed properly.

¾ [Analogue] The reference station is not assigned correctly in

“Editor”. Select the correct reference station. (> 30)

¾ [Analogue] Programme information about analogue broadcasts

is not displayed when you set “TV Guide Type” to “Digital Channels”. To use the TV Guide for the analogue broadcasts, change “TV Guide Type”. (> 71)

¾ There was a programme change.

Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the TV Guide system provider or station provider.

The TV Guide data transfer was interrupted.

¾ The TV Guide system shows the data that was received up to

the interruption.

¾ The programme information may be incomplete.

The TV Guide data is not updated.

¾ The unit must be in standby mode in order to update the data. If

the unit is in EXT LINK mode (EXT-L lights up in the display), then the data update may also not work.

¾ Make sure that the time is set correctly. ¾ [DVB-T] [Analogue] Make sure that “TV Guide Download in

Standby” or “Night Download” is set to “On”. (> 30, 71)

HOWVIEW.

VQT3C69

Digital broadcast

VIERA Link

[DVB-T] Digital broadcasts cannot be received.

¾ Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet. ¾ The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV station,

or the direction of the aerial may have changed due to strong winds or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.

¾ Switch “Active Antenna” to “On” in the Setup menu if you are

using an indoor antenna. (> 70)

[DVB-T] After DVB Auto Setup only some or no DVB channels are found.

¾ Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB transmissions. ¾ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.

If you live within 5-10 km of DVB transmission towers, a combined VHF/UHF aerial should be adequate. Outside this area, separate VHF and UHF aerials provide superior reception performance. (> 6)

Picture regularly breaks up on some channels. “No Signal” message is displayed.

¾ Interference (known as impulse noise) from household

appliances such as light switches, fridges etc. may cause picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer or CATV provider.

¾ Adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the

Setup menu. (> 65)

¾ Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength”

are displayed in red or constantly changing, check the aerial or the connection. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer or CATV provider. (> 65)

¾ Check that the aerial or connecting cable is designed for DVB. ¾ Check the connection.

[DVB-T] Picture very infrequently breaks up on some or all channels.

¾ Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant

lighting storms or heavy rain with wind in “leafy” locations may cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort momentarily.

¾ Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical

appliance, or a passing vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy” ignition system.

[DVB-C] Even after scanning channels with “Full Scan” in DVB Auto Setup, some channels are not found or no channels are found.

¾ Check the connections. (> 6, 73) ¾ You can specify optional symbol rates for scanning channels as

follows:

1 Restart auto channel setting. (> 64, Auto Setup Restart) 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Digital Cable (DVB-C) & Analogue

Channels” or “Digital Cable (DVB-C) Channels” and press [OK].

3 Press [OPTION] in “DVB Auto Setup” screen. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “---- ksym/s (User Def.)” and enter

the symbol rate with numbered buttons and then press [OK].

5 Press [OK].

Then go to step 5 on page 8 and complete the settings.

Refer to your CATV provider about the symbol rate information.

VIERA Link doesn’t work.

¾ Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is

displayed on the front display when the power for the main unit is set to On.

¾ Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”. (> 69) ¾ Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device. ¾ Some functions may not work if depending on the version of

“HDAVI Control” of the connected equipment. This unit supports “HDAVI Control 5” functions.

¾ If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was

changed, or if there was a power failure or the plug was removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control” may not work. In this case, perform the following operations. 1 When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the

power on, turn the TV (VIERA) on again.

2 Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control”

function to off, and then set to on again. (For more information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)

3 Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit,

and after this unit’s screen is displayed check that “HDAVI Control” is working.

The operation on this unit (music playback etc.) is interrupted.

¾ The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press

buttons on the TV remote control that do not work for VIERA Link functions.

To reset this unit

To return all the settings other than the main ones to the factory preset

¾ Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the

settings except for language settings, Slideshow Settings, clock settings, ratings levels and PINs (“Ratings” in Disc menu and “Child Lock” in Tuning menu), etc. return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled. (> 71)

¾ Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the

settings except for tuning settings, clock settings, language settings, disc language settings, remote control code, ratings levels and PINs (“Ratings” in Disc menu and “Child Lock” in Tuning menu), etc. return to the factory presets. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled. (> 71)

¾ Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the

Language setting screen appears. All the settings except for clock settings, remote control code, ratings levels and PINs (“Ratings” in Disc menu and “Child Lock” in Tuning menu), etc. return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.

To reset the ratings level settings

¾ While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select

the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.

To restore the unit if it freezes due to one of the safety devices being activated

¾ Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 3 seconds. (The

settings remain.)

Other

After performing an update, you can no longer receive broadcasts.

¾ Depending on the content of the update, some settings may

have returned to the preset values. Fix the settings again.

Reference

VQT3C69

Specifications

Recording system DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format

DVD-R : DVD-Video format

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format

DVD-RW : DVD-Video format

+R DL (Double Layer)

+RW

Recordable discs

DVD-RAM: 2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),

2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)

DVD-R: 1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),

1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1) DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): 2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0) DVD-RW: 1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),

2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

+R: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),

2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3) +R DL: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1) +RW: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

Recording time Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)

XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours

LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours

Maximum Approx. 279 hours with 160 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)

XP: Approx. 35 hours, SP: Approx. 70 hours

LP: Approx. 140 hours, EP: Approx. 209 hours/279 hours

Playable discs

DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format, JPEG

DVD-R : DVD-Video format, MP3

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format,

§1

, JPEG§1, DivX

§1

, JPEG§1, DivX

MP3

DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format

+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW

DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD, SVCD

CD-R/CD-RW : CD-DA§1, Video CD§1, SVCD

§1§2

JPEG

, MP3§1,

, DivX

Internal HDD capacity 160 GB

Optical pick-up System with 1 lens, 2 integration units

(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)

LASER specification

Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)

Wave length:

CD 780 nm wave length DVD 662 nm wave length

Laser power:

No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection

Audio

Recording system: Dolby Digital 2ch (XP, SP LP, EP mode),

Linear PCM (XP mode) Audio in: AV1/AV2 (21 pin) Input level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz Input impedance: More than 10 k≠ Audio out: AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack) Output level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz Output impedance: Less than 1 k≠ Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)

HDMI Output 19 pin type A: 1 pc ≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 5” function.

Video

Video system:

SECAM (only input)/PAL colour signal

NTSC colour signal

Recording system: MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR) Video in (PAL/SECAM/NTSC): AV1/AV2 (21 pin), 1 Vp-p 75 ≠ S-Video in (PAL/SECAM/NTSC): AV2 (21 pin), 1 Vp-p 75 ≠ Video out (PAL/NTSC):

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack), 1 Vp-p 75 ≠

S-Video out (PAL/NTSC): AV1 (21 pin), 1 Vp-p 75 ≠ RGB out (PAL/NTSC):

AV1 (21 pin), 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠

Television system

Tuner system Channel coverage

PAL -B, G,H (CCIR)

VHF: E2–E12, A–H2 (Italy) UHF: 21–69 CATV: S01–S05 (S1–S3),

S1–S20 (M1–U10), S21–S41

DVB-T/C (Germany)

VHF: 5–12 UHF: 21–69 CATV: D051 - D073, D113 - D858,

S1–S20 (M1–U10) 7 MHz Band 51 – 858 MHz

RF converter output: Not provided Active Antenna output: 5 V switched, 50 mA max.,

over current protected.

USB port Type A : 1 pc

USB standard: USB 2.0 High Speed Format: FAT16, FAT32

Video (SD Video)

§3

Codec: MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile) File Format: SD-Video format conforming

Common Interface (CI) Slot

EN 50221 Standard, 1 slot, Type I and II PC Card (5 V only),

rear side

Others

§1

Region code: Operating temperature: 5 oC to 40 oC Operating humidity range: 10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation) Power supply: AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz

‚ 2

Power consumption: Approx. 38 W

§2

Dimensions (WkHkD): 430 mmk59 mmk286 mm Mass: Approx. 3.5 kg

Power consumption in standby mode:

Approx. 0.3 W (“Power Save in Standby” is activated and

“RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off”.)

Approx. 16 W (“Power Save in Standby” is not activated.)

Note

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

§1

Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.

§2

Conforming to IEC62107 This unit is not compatible with “Chaoji Video CD” available on the market including CVD, DVCD and SVCD that do not conform to IEC62107.

§3

Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, to HDD or DVD-RAM disc. After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVDRAM disc, the playback is possible.

VQT3C69

Glossary

Bitstream

This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel) before it is decoded into its various channels.

CI (Common Interface)

Common Interface is a defined standard, to enable the addition of a CAM (Conditional Access Module) in a Digital TV/Recorder.

CI Plus

CI Plus is a technical specification that adds additional security and features to the proven DVB Common Interface Standard that will allow CI Plus compatible consumer electronics devices, such as Integrated Digital Televisions and Set Top Boxes, access to a wide range of Pay TV Services via a Plug-in CI Plus CAM wherever the CI Plus Technology is supported by the local Pay TV Provider.

CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)

CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with CPRM compatible recorders and discs.

Decoder

A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This is called decoding.

Deep Colour

This unit incorporates HDMI reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when connected to a compatible TV. You can enjoy exceptionally rich, natural-looking colours, with smooth, detailed gradation and minimal colour banding. [A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour, will be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support Deep Colour. The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the connected TV.]

DivX

DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively small file size.

Dolby Digital

This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can be recorded on one disc using this method. When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default audio.

Down-mixing

This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then only output the front two channels.

Drive

In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD) and disc (DVD). These perform the reading and writing of data.

DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are possible.

Dynamic range

Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest level of sound before distortion occurs. Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.

Film and video

DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable method of progressive output.

Film: Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24

frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs recorded at 30 frames per second as well.) Generally appropriate for motion picture films.

Video: Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second (PAL discs)

or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs). Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation.

Finalise

A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc. possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalise DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL on this unit. After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for recording again.

Deep Colour technology that can

Folder

This is a place on the hard disk or disc where groups of data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place where still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2 are stored.

Formatting

Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment. You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format), +RW and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit. Formatting permanently deletes all contents.

Frames and fields

Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.

Frame Field Field

≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but

picture quality is generally better.

≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but

there is no blurring.

H.264

This is a method of video compression and is equivalent to MPEG-4 AVC. It has a broad application range that covers all forms of digital compressed video from low bit-rate Internet streaming applications to HD broadcasts.

HDD (Hard disk drive)

This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports highdefinition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)] from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high definition compatible television is required.

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures. If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc., the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering the degree of compression.

LPCM (Linear PCM)

These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on CDs.

MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)

A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video. MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2. SD Video files shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)

An audio compression method that compresses audio to approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of audio quality.

Pan&Scan/Letterbox

In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.

Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture

fills the screen.

Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and

bottom of the picture so the picture itself appears in an aspect ratio of 16:9.

Playback control (PBC)

If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and information with menus. (This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)

Reference

VQT3C69

Glossary

Protection

You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or deletion protection.

RGB

This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G), and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them. By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission, noise is reduced for even higher quality images.

Sampling frequency

Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave (analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the original sound.

Signal Quality

This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels you can receive are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time (day/night), region, length of the cable that is connected to the aerial, etc.

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.

Thumbnail

This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display multiple pictures in the form of a list.

1080i

In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because 1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of 480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic and rich image.

1080p

In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the same time every 1/50 Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.

720p

In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same time every 1/50 progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.

of a second to create a progressive image.

of a second to create a progressive image. Since

For business users in the European Union

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.

VQT3C69

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.

HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.

HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW are (1) registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3) subject of various international patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates.

GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.

The recording and playback of content on this or any other device may require permission from the owner of the copyright or other such rights in that content. Panasonic has no authority to and does not grant you that permission and explicitly disclaims any right, ability or intention to obtain such permission on your behalf. It is your responsibility to ensure that your use of this or any other device complies with applicable copyright legislation in your country. Please refer to that legislation for more information on the relevant laws and regulations involved or contact the owner of the rights in the content you wish to record or playback.

The “CI Plus” Logo is a trademark of CI Plus LLP.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/

DivX

, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of

DivX, Inc. and are used under license.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

“DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.

)

Reference

VQT3C69

Index

Active Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 70

Adjust the audio quality

(Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Adjust the picture quality

(Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Album (Music)

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Album (Still picture)

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Audio

Digital broadcast

(DVB Multi Audio) . . . . . . 17, 19, 60, 66

Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Auto Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

AV2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Channel

Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 66

Channel List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 42

Chapter Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 67

Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

CI Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 72, 85

Cleaning

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 70

Connection

Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 73

Amplifier, receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Digital satellite receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 7, 73

Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Copy

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Title/Playlist (Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 49

CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 43

Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 48

Delete

Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 45

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 49

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 49

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Digital Audio Output settings . . . . 68, 69

Digital broadcast

Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . 17

DVB Multi Audio . . . . . . . . . 17, 19, 60, 66

DVB Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 19, 61, 66

New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 65

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . 33, 37, 42, 46

Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–13

Display

Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . 17

Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 35–36, 85

DVB Multi Audio

Record with selected audio . . . . . . . . . 19

Select audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 60

DVB Subtitle

Record with subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Select subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 61

Show subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Edit

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 49

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Enabling discs to be played on other

equipment - Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 85

Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 85

FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . 23, 24

FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . 5, 41, 68

GUIDE Plus+ . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 20, 30, 31

H.264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

HDAVI Control . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 39–40, 69

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 69, 85

High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

HOLD function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 37–38, 85

Language

Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 67

Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 67

Linked timer recordings with external

equipment (digital satellite receiver)

—EXT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 70

LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 85

Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35–36

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Mode

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 36

Music on HDD

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Name

Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 49

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 43

Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 65

On-screen

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 48

Power Save in Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Properties

Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 49

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 46

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Protection

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Q Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 67

Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

External Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 26–31

Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 60

Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Series recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

HOWVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 38, 49

Smart Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Still picture

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Subtitle

Digital broadcast

(DVB Subtitle) . . . . . . . . . 17, 19, 61, 66

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 67

Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc

(Disc menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Tuning

Analogue broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

List of TV Reception Channels . . . . . . . 75

TV Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 20, 27, 31

TV Guide Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

USB

Copy (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57

Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 39–40, 69

Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper.

Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2)

Panasonic Testing Centre Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site: http://panasonic.net

VQT3C69

F1210MT0

Panasonic DMR-EX84C Operating Instructions

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual